S79FL01GSDSBHBC13 [INFINEON]

Dual QSPI Flash;
S79FL01GSDSBHBC13
型号: S79FL01GSDSBHBC13
厂家: Infineon    Infineon
描述:

Dual QSPI Flash

文件: 总138页 (文件大小:2570K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
S79FL01GS  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI  
Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Features  
• Density  
- 1 Gbit (128 Mbytes)  
• Serial peripheral interface (SPI)  
- SPI clock polarity and phase modes 0 and 3  
- Double data rate (DDR) option  
- Extended addressing: 32-bit address  
• READ commands  
- Dual-Quad SPI Quad Read: 104 MHz clock rate (104 MB/s)  
- Dual-Quad SPI Quad DDR Read: 80 MHz clock rate (160 MB/s)  
- Normal, Fast, Quad, Quad DDR  
- AutoBoot - power up or reset and execute a Normal or Quad read command automatically at a preselected  
address  
- Common flash interface (CFI) data for configuration information.  
• Programming (3 Mbytes/s)  
- 1024-byte page programming buffer  
- Quad-input page programming (QPP) for slow clock systems  
- Automatic error checking and correction (ECC) – internal hardware ECC with single bit error correction  
• Erase (1 Mbyte/s)  
- Uniform 512-kbyte sectors  
- Extended addressing: 24- or 32-bit address options  
• Cycling endurance  
- 100,000 program-erase cycles, minimum  
• Data retention  
- 20 year data retention, minimum  
• Security features  
- Separate one time program (OTP) array of 2048 bytes  
- Block protection:  
• Status register bits to control protection against program or erase of a contiguous range of sectors  
• Hardware and software control options  
- Advanced sector protection (ASP)  
• Individual sector protection controlled by boot code or password  
• 65 nm MIRRORBIT™ technology with Eclipse architecture  
• Core supply voltage: 2.7 V to 3.6 V  
• Temperature range:  
- Industrial (–40°C to +85°C)  
- Industrial Plus (–40°C to +105°C)  
- Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 3 (–40°C to +85°C)  
- Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 2 (–40°C to +105°C)  
Datasheet  
www.infineon.com  
Please read the Important Notice and Warnings at the end of this document  
page 1  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Performance summary  
• Packages (all Pb-free)  
- BGA-24 6 × 8 mm  
• 5 × 5 ball (ZSA024) footprint  
• Software features  
- Program suspend and resume  
- Erase suspend and resume  
- Status register provides status of embedded erase or programming operation  
- CFI-compliant — allows the host system to identify the flash device and determine its capabilities  
- JEDEC JESD216 serial flash discoverable parameter (SFDP) support  
- User-configurable Configuration Register  
• Hardware features  
- Hardware reset input (RESET#) — resets device to standby state  
Performance summary  
Maximum read rates SDR dual-quad SPI (VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V)  
Command  
Clock rate (MHz)  
MBps  
12.5  
33  
Read  
50  
Fast read  
Quad read  
133  
104  
104  
Maximum read rates DDR dual-quad SPI (VCC = 3 V to 3.6 V)  
Command  
Clock rate (MHz)  
MBps  
DDR Quad read  
80  
160  
Typical program and erase rates dual-quad SPI  
Operation  
KBps  
3000  
1000  
Page programming (1024-byte page buffer)  
512-kbyte logical sector erase  
Typical current consumption, dual-quad SPI  
Operation  
Current (mA)  
32 (max)  
Serial read 50 MHz  
Serial fast read 133 MHz  
Quad read 104 MHz  
Program  
66 (max)  
122 (max)  
200 (max)  
200 (max)  
0.14 (typ)  
Erase  
Standby  
Datasheet  
2
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Table of contents  
Table of contents  
Features ...........................................................................................................................................1  
Performance summary ......................................................................................................................2  
Table of contents...............................................................................................................................3  
1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................5  
1.1 General description ................................................................................................................................................5  
2 SPI with multiple input / output (SPI-MIO) dual-quad.........................................................................6  
3 Signal descriptions .........................................................................................................................7  
3.1 Input/output summary...........................................................................................................................................7  
3.2 Multiple Input / Output (Dual-Quad SPI) ...............................................................................................................8  
3.3 RESET#.....................................................................................................................................................................8  
3.4 Serial Clock (SCK1, SCK2) .......................................................................................................................................8  
3.5 Chip Select (CS1#, CS2#).........................................................................................................................................8  
3.6 Input Output IO0–IO7 .............................................................................................................................................8  
3.7 Core Voltage Supply (VCC).......................................................................................................................................8  
3.8 Versatile I/O Power Supply (VIO).............................................................................................................................9  
3.9 Supply and Signal Ground (VSS) .............................................................................................................................9  
3.10 Not Connected (NC) ..............................................................................................................................................9  
3.11 Reserved for Future Use (RFU) .............................................................................................................................9  
3.12 Do Not Use (DNU)..................................................................................................................................................9  
3.13 Block diagram .....................................................................................................................................................10  
4 Signal protocols............................................................................................................................11  
4.1 SPI clock modes ....................................................................................................................................................11  
4.2 Command protocol...............................................................................................................................................13  
4.3 Interface states .....................................................................................................................................................17  
4.4 Configuration Register effects on the interface ..................................................................................................21  
4.5 Data protection.....................................................................................................................................................21  
5 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................22  
5.1 Absolute maximum ratings ..................................................................................................................................22  
5.2 Thermal resistance ...............................................................................................................................................22  
5.3 Operating ranges ..................................................................................................................................................23  
5.4 Power-up and power-down..................................................................................................................................24  
5.5 DC characteristics .................................................................................................................................................26  
6 Timing specifications ....................................................................................................................27  
6.1 Key to switching waveforms.................................................................................................................................27  
6.2 AC test conditions .................................................................................................................................................28  
6.3 Reset ......................................................................................................................................................................29  
6.4 SDR AC characteristics..........................................................................................................................................31  
6.5 DDR AC characteristics .........................................................................................................................................33  
7 Physical interface .........................................................................................................................36  
7.1 Dual-Quad 24-ball BGA package (ZSA024) ..........................................................................................................36  
8 Address space maps ......................................................................................................................38  
8.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................38  
8.2 Flash memory array ..............................................................................................................................................38  
8.3 ID-CFI address space.............................................................................................................................................38  
8.4 JEDEC JESD216 serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) space .................................................................39  
8.5 OTP address space................................................................................................................................................39  
8.6 Registers................................................................................................................................................................41  
9 Data protection ............................................................................................................................53  
9.1 Secure silicon region (OTP) ..................................................................................................................................53  
9.2 Write Enable command ........................................................................................................................................53  
9.3 Block protection ...................................................................................................................................................54  
Datasheet  
3
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Table of contents  
9.4 Advanced sector protection .................................................................................................................................55  
10 Commands .................................................................................................................................59  
10.1 Command set summary .....................................................................................................................................60  
10.2 Identification commands ...................................................................................................................................66  
10.3 Register Access commands ................................................................................................................................69  
10.4 Read Memory Array commands .........................................................................................................................80  
10.5 Program Flash Array commands........................................................................................................................89  
10.6 Erase Flash Array commands .............................................................................................................................93  
10.7 One Time Program Array commands.................................................................................................................97  
10.8 Advanced Sector Protection commands...........................................................................................................99  
10.9 Reset commands ..............................................................................................................................................106  
10.10 Embedded algorithm performance tables ....................................................................................................107  
11 Data integrity ........................................................................................................................... 108  
11.1 Erase endurance ...............................................................................................................................................108  
11.2 Data retention ...................................................................................................................................................108  
12 Software interface reference ..................................................................................................... 109  
12.1 Serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) address map............................................................................109  
12.2 Device ID and common flash interface (ID-CFI) address map ........................................................................113  
12.3 Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map — automotive only.............................................132  
12.4 Initial delivery state ..........................................................................................................................................133  
13 Ordering information ................................................................................................................ 134  
13.1 Valid combinations — standard .......................................................................................................................135  
13.2 Valid combinations — automotive grade / AEC-Q100.....................................................................................135  
Revision history ............................................................................................................................ 136  
Datasheet  
4
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Overview  
1
Overview  
1.1  
General description  
The S79FL01GS device is a flash non-volatile memory product using:  
• MIRRORBIT™ technology — that stores two data bits in each memory array transistor  
• Eclipse architecture — that dramatically improves program and erase performance  
• 65-nm process lithography  
The S79FL01GS device connects two Quad I/O SPI devices with a single CS# resulting in an eight bit I/O data path.  
This Byte I/O interface is called Dual-Quad I/O.  
This device connects to a host system via a serial peripheral interface (SPI). Traditional SPI single bit serial input  
and output (IO1 and IO5) is supported as well as four-bit (Quad I/O or QIO) serial commands. This multiple width  
interface is called SPI multi-I/O or MIO. In addition, the S79FL01GS device adds support for double data rate (DDR)  
read commands for QIO that transfers address and read data on both edges of the clock.  
The Eclipse architecture features a page programming buffer that allows up to 512 words (1024 bytes) to be  
programmed in one operation, resulting in significantly faster effective programming (up to 3 MB/s) and erase  
(up to 1 MB/s) than prior generation SPI program or erase algorithms.  
Executing code directly from flash memory is often called eXecute-in-Place (XIP). By using the S79FL01GS device  
at the higher clock rates supported, with QIO or DDR-QIO commands, the instruction read transfer rate can match  
or exceed traditional parallel interface, asynchronous, NOR flash memories while reducing signal count  
dramatically.  
The S79FL01GS product offers high density coupled with the fastest read and write performance required by a  
variety of embedded applications. It is ideal for code shadowing, XIP, and data storage.  
Datasheet  
5
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
SPI with multiple input / output (SPI-MIO)  
dual-quad  
2
SPI with multiple input / output (SPI-MIO) dual-quad  
Many memory devices connect to their host system with separate parallel control, address, and data signals that  
require a large number of signal connections and larger package size. The large number of connections increase  
power consumption due to so many signals switching and the larger package increases cost.  
The S79FL01GS device reduces the number of signals for connection to the host system by serially transferring  
all control, address, and data information over 10 signals. This reduces the cost of the memory package, reduces  
signal switching power, and either reduces the host connection count or frees host connectors for use in  
providing other features.  
The S79FL01GS Dual-Quad SPI device uses the industry standard single bit serial peripheral interface (SPI) using  
two Quad SPI devices in each package (Quad SPI-1 and Quad SPI-2). This interface is called Dual-Quad and  
enables support of Byte wide (8 bit) serial transfers. There is one package option available for S79FL01GS:  
• 24-ball BGA package with separate balls for CS1#, SCK1 (Quad SPI-1) and CS2#, SCK1 (Quad SPI-2).  
For documentation simplicity, all AC timings and waveforms and DC specification are defined using single CS#  
(Chip Select) and SCK (Serial Clock) signals. For S79FL01GS, the CS# signal for Quad SPI-1 and Quad SPI-2 are  
externally tied together, and the SCK signal for Quad SPI-1 and Quad SPI-2 are externally tied together.  
Datasheet  
6
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
3
Signal descriptions  
3.1  
Input/output summary  
Table 1  
Signal name  
Dual-quad input/output descriptions  
Type  
Description  
Hardware Reset. LOW = device resets and returns to standby state, ready to receive a  
command. The signal has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host  
system if not used.  
RESET#  
Input  
SCK1  
SCK2  
CS1#  
CS2#  
IO0  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Input  
I/O  
Serial Clock for Quad SPI-1  
Serial Clock for Quad SPI-2  
Chip Select for Quad SPI-1  
Chip Select for Quad SPI-2  
I/O 0 for Quad SPI-1  
I/O 1 for Quad SPI-1  
I/O 2 for Quad SPI-1  
I/O 3 for Quad SPI-1  
I/O 0 for Quad SPI-2  
I/O 1 for Quad SPI-2  
I/O 2 for Quad SPI-2  
I/O 3 for Quad SPI-2  
Core Power Supply  
Ground  
IO1  
I/O  
IO2  
I/O  
IO3  
I/O  
IO4  
I/O  
IO5  
I/O  
IO6  
I/O  
IO7  
I/O  
V
V
Supply  
Supply  
CC  
SS  
Not Connected. No device internal signal is connected to the package connector nor is there  
any future plan to use the connector for a signal. The connection may safely be used for  
NC  
Unused routing space for a signal on a printed circuit board (PCB). However, any signal connected to  
a NC pin must not have voltage levels higher than the V absolute maximum shown on  
CC  
Features page (core supply voltage).  
Reserved for Future Use. No device internal signal is currently connected to the package  
connector but there is potential future use for the connector for a signal. It is recommended  
to not use RFU connectors for PCB routing channels so that the PCB may take advantage of  
future enhanced features in compatible footprint devices.  
RFU  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Do Not Use. A device internal signal may be connected to the package connector. The  
connection may be used by Infineon for test or other purposes and is not intended for  
connection to any host system signal. Any DNU signal related function will be inactive when  
DNU  
the signal is at V . The signal has an internal pull-down resistor and may be left unconnected  
IL  
in the host system or may be tied to VSS. Do not use these connections for PCB signal routing  
channels. Do not connect any host system signal to this connection.  
Note  
1. For the BGA package, there are two CS# and two SCK balls.  
Datasheet  
7
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
3.2  
Multiple Input / Output (Dual-Quad SPI)  
Quad input / output (I/O) commands send instructions to the memory only on the IO0 (Quad SPI-1) and IO4 (Quad  
SPI-2) signals. Address is sent from the host to the memory as four bit (nibble) on IO0, IO1, IO2, IO3 (Quad  
SPI-1)and repeated on IO4, IO5, IO6, IO7 (Quad SPI-2). Data is sent and returned to the host as bytes on IO0–IO7.  
3.3  
RESET#  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the device to standby state, ready for receiving a  
command. When RESET# is driven to logic LOW (VIL) for at least a period of tRP, the device:  
• terminates any operation in progress,  
• tristates all outputs,  
• resets the volatile bits in the Configuration Register,  
• resets the volatile bits in the Status Registers,  
• resets the Bank Address Register to zero,  
• loads the Program Buffer with all ones,  
• reloads all internal configuration information necessary to bring the device to standby mode,  
• and resets the internal control unit to standby state.  
RESET# causes the same initialization process as is performed when power comes up and requires tPU time.  
RESET# may be asserted LOW at any time. To ensure data integrity any operation that was interrupted by a  
hardware reset should be reinitiated once the device is ready to accept a command sequence.  
When RESET# is first asserted LOW, the device draws ICC1 (50 MHz value) during tPU. If RESET# continues to be  
held at VSS the device draws CMOS standby current (ISB).  
RESET# has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system if not used.  
The RESET# input is not available on all packages options. When not available the RESET# input of the device is  
tied to the inactive state, inside the package.  
3.4  
Serial Clock (SCK1, SCK2)  
This input signal provides the synchronization reference for the SPI interface. Instructions, addresses, or data  
input are latched on the rising edge of the SCK signal. Data output changes after the falling edge of SCK, in SDR  
commands, and after every edge in DDR commands.  
3.5  
Chip Select (CS1#, CS2#)  
The chip select signal indicates when a command for the device is in process and the other signals are relevant  
for the memory device. When the CS# signal is at the logic HIGH state, the device is not selected and all input  
signals are ignored and all output signals are high impedance. Unless an internal program, erase or write registers  
(WRR) embedded operation is in progress, the device will be in the Standby Power mode. Driving the CS# input  
to logic LOW state enables the device, placing it in the Active Power mode. After power-up, a falling edge on CS#  
is required prior to the start of any command.  
3.6  
Input Output IO0–IO7  
These signals are input and outputs for receiving instructions, addresses, and data to be programmed (values  
latched on rising edge of serial SCK clock signal) as well as shifting out data (on the falling edge of SCK, in SDR  
commands, and on every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).  
3.7  
Core Voltage Supply (VCC)  
VCC is the voltage source for all device internal logic. It is the single voltage used for all device internal functions  
including read, program, and erase. The voltage may vary from 2.7 V to 3.6 V.  
Datasheet  
8
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
3.8  
Versatile I/O Power Supply (VIO)  
VIO functionality is not supported on the standard configuration of the S79FL01GS device. However, this VIO signal  
(ball E4) is bonded out on the package and must be tied to VCC on the PCB.  
3.9  
Supply and Signal Ground (VSS)  
VSS is the common voltage drain and ground reference for the device core, input signal receivers, and output  
drivers.  
3.10  
Not Connected (NC)  
No device internal signal is connected to the package connector nor is there any future plan to use the connector  
for a signal. The connection may safely be used for routing space for a signal on a printed circuit board (PCB).  
However, any signal connected to an NC must not have voltage levels higher than VIO.  
3.11  
Reserved for Future Use (RFU)  
No device internal signal is currently connected to the package connector but is there potential future use of the  
connector. It is recommended to not use RFU connectors for PCB routing channels so that the PCB may take  
advantage of future enhanced features in compatible footprint devices.  
3.12  
Do Not Use (DNU)  
A device internal signal may be connected to the package connector. The connection may be used by Infineon  
for test or other purposes and is not intended for connection to any host system signal. Any DNU signal related  
function will be inactive when the signal is at VIL. The signal has an internal pull-down resistor and may be left  
unconnected in the host system or may be tied to VSS. Do not use these connections for PCB signal routing  
channels. Do not connect any host system signal to these connections.  
Datasheet  
9
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
3.13  
Block diagram  
IO0 – IO3  
IO0 – IO3  
Quad SPI-1  
SCK1  
SCK  
CS#  
CS1#  
RESET#  
RESET#  
CS2#  
SCK2  
Quad SPI-2  
IO4 – IO7  
IO4 – IO7  
SPI HOST  
S79FL01GS Dual-Quad SPI Device  
Figure 1  
SPI host and S79FL01GS dual-quad SPI device with dual CS# and SCK balls in the 24-ball BGA  
package (5x5 ball configuration)  
Notes  
2. The SPI host outputs one Chip Select (CS#) signal, that is routed to CS1# and CS2# balls on the S79FL01GS  
device.  
3. The SPI host outputs one Clock (SCK) signal, that is routed to SCK1 and SCK2 balls on the S79FL01GS device.  
Datasheet  
10  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
4
Signal protocols  
SPI clock modes  
4.1  
4.1.1  
Single data rate (SDR)  
The S79FL01GS device can be driven by an embedded microcontroller (bus master) in either of the two following  
clocking modes.  
Mode 0 with Clock Polarity (CPOL) = 0 and, Clock Phase (CPHA) = 0  
Mode 3 with CPOL = 1 and, CPHA = 1  
For these two modes, input data into the device is always latched in on the rising edge of the SCK signal and the  
output data is always available from the falling edge of the SCK clock signal.  
The difference between the two modes is the clock polarity when the bus master is in standby mode and not  
transferring any data.  
• SCK will stay at logic LOW state with CPOL = 0, CPHA = 0  
• SCK will stay at logic HIGH state with CPOL = 1, CPHA = 1  
CPOL=0_CPHA=0_SCK  
CPOL=1_CPHA=1_SCK  
CS#  
IO0  
IO1  
IO4  
IO5  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
Figure 2  
Dual-quad SPI SDR modes supported  
Timing diagrams throughout the remainder of the document are generally shown as both Mode 0 and 3 by  
showing SCK as both HIGH and LOW at the fall of CS#. In some cases a timing diagram may show only Mode 0 with  
SCK LOW at the fall of CS#. In this case, Mode 3 timing simply means clock is HIGH at the fall of CS# so no SCK  
rising edge set up or hold time to the falling edge of CS# is needed for Mode 3.  
SCK cycles are measured (counted) from one falling edge of SCK to the next falling edge of SCK. In Mode 0, the  
beginning of the first SCK cycle in a command is measured from the falling edge of CS# to the first falling edge of  
SCK because SCK is already LOW at the beginning of a command.  
Datasheet  
11  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
4.1.2  
Double data rate (DDR)  
Mode 0 and Mode 3 are also supported for DDR commands. In DDR commands, the instruction bits are always  
latched on the rising edge of clock, the same as in SDR commands. However, the address and input data that  
follow the instruction are latched on both the rising and falling edges of SCK. The first address bit is latched on  
the first rising edge of SCK following the falling edge at the end of the last instruction bit. The first bit of output  
data is driven on the falling edge at the end of the last access latency (dummy) cycle.  
SCK cycles are measured (counted) in the same way as in SDR commands, from one falling edge of SCK to the  
next falling edge of SCK. In Mode 0, the beginning of the first SCK cycle in a command is measured from the falling  
edge of CS# to the first falling edge of SCK because SCK is already LOW at the beginning of a command.  
CPOL=0_CPHA=0_SCK  
CPOL=1_CPHA=1_SCK  
CS#  
Transfer_Phase  
Instruction  
Inst. 7  
Address  
Inst. 0 A28 A24  
A29 A25  
Mode  
A0 M4 M0  
A1 M5 M1  
A2 M6 M2  
A3 M7 M3  
A0 M4 M0  
A1 M5 M1  
A2 M6 M2  
A3 M7 M3  
Dummy / DLP  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6  
IO7  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
DL  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D0 D1  
D0 D1  
D0 D1  
D0 D1  
D0 D1  
D0 D1  
D0 D1  
D0 D1  
A30 A26  
A31 A27  
Inst. 7  
Inst. 0 A28 A24  
A29 A25  
A30 A26  
A31 A27  
Figure 3  
Dual-quad SPI DDR modes supported  
Datasheet  
12  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
4.2  
Command protocol  
All communication between the host system and S79FL01GS memory device is in the form of units called  
commands.  
All commands begin with an instruction that selects the type of information transfer or device operation to be  
performed. Commands may also have an address, instruction modifier, latency period, data transfer to the  
memory, or data transfer from the memory. All instruction, address, and data information is transferred serially  
between the host system and memory device.  
Quad input / output (I/O) commands provide an address sent from the host as four bit (nibble) groups on IO0,  
IO1, IO2, IO3 and repeated on IO4, IO5, IO6, IO7, then followed by dummy cycles. Data is returned to the host as  
byte on IO0–IO7. This is referenced as 2-8-8 for Quad I/O command protocols.  
Commands are structured as follows:  
• Each command begins with CS# going LOW and ends with CS# returning HIGH. The memory device is selected  
by the host driving the Chip Select (CS#) signal LOW throughout a command.  
• The serial clock (SCK) marks the transfer of each bit or group of bits between the host and memory.  
• Each command begins with an 8-bit (byte) instruction. The instruction is always presented only as a single bit  
serial sequence on the Serial Input (SI) signal with one bit transferred to the memory device on each SCK rising  
edge. The instruction selects the type of information transfer or device operation to be performed.  
• The instruction may be stand alone or may be followed by address bits to select a location within one of several  
address spaces in the device. The instruction determines the address space used. The address may be either a  
24-bit or a 32-bit byte boundary, address. The address transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands,  
or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
• Quad I/O read instructions send an instruction modifier called Continuous Read mode bits, following the  
address, to indicate whether the next command will be of the same type with an implied, rather than an explicit,  
instruction. These mode bits initiate or end the continuous read mode. In continuous read mode, the next  
command thus does not provide an instruction byte, only a new address and mode bits. This reduces the time  
needed to send each command when the same command type is repeated in a sequence of commands. The  
mode bit transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
The width of all transfers following the instruction are determined by the instruction sent. Following transfers  
may continue to be single bit serial on only the SI or Serial Output (SO) signals, they may be done in 4-bit groups  
per (quad) transfer on the IO0–IO3 signals. Within the quad groups the least significant bit is on IO0. More  
significant bits are placed in significance order on each higher numbered IO signal. Single bits or parallel bit  
groups are transferred in most to least significant bit order.  
• Some instructions send an instruction modifier called mode bits, following the address, to indicate that the  
next command will be of the same type with an implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command  
thus does not provide an instruction byte, only a new address and mode bits. This reduces the time needed to  
send each command when the same command type is repeated in a sequence of commands. The mode bit  
transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
• The address or mode bits may be followed by write data to be stored in the memory device or by a read latency  
period before read data is returned to the host.  
• Write data bit transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
• SCK continues to toggle during any read access latency period. The latency may be zero to several SCK cycles  
(also referred to as dummy cycles). At the end of the read latency cycles, the first read data bits are driven from  
the outputs on SCK falling edge at the end of the last read latency cycle. The first read data bits are considered  
transferred to the host on the following SCK rising edge. Each following transfer occurs on the next SCK rising  
edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
• If the command returns read data to the host, the device continues sending data transfers until the host takes  
the CS# signal HIGH. The CS# signal can be driven HIGH after any transfer in the read data sequence. This will  
terminate the command.  
Datasheet  
13  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
• At the end of a command that does not return data, the host drives the CS# input HIGH. The CS# signal must go  
HIGH after the eighth bit, of a standalone instruction or, of the last write data byte that is transferred. That is,  
the CS# signal must be driven HIGH when the number of clock cycles after CS# signal was driven LOW is an exact  
multiple of eight cycles. If the CS# signal does not go HIGH exactly at the eight SCK cycle boundary of the  
instruction or write data, the command is rejected and not executed.  
• All instruction, address, and mode bits are shifted into the device with the Most Significant bits (MSB) first. The  
data bits are shifted in and out of the device MSB first. All data is transferred in byte units with the lowest address  
byte sent first. Following bytes of data are sent in lowest to highest byte address order i.e. the byte address  
increments.  
• All attempts to read the flash memory array during a program, erase, or a write cycle (embedded operations)  
are ignored. The embedded operation will continue to execute without any affect. A very limited set of  
commands are accepted during an embedded operation. These are discussed in the individual command  
descriptions.  
• Depending on the command, the time for execution varies. A command to read status information from an  
executing command is available to determine when the command completes execution and whether the  
command was successful.  
4.2.1  
Command sequence examples  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 4  
Dual-Quad Standalone Instruction command  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 5  
Dual-Quad Single bit Wide Input command  
Note  
4. Instruction needs to be the same for both IO0 (Quad SPI-1) and IO4 (Quad SPI-2).  
Datasheet  
14  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
31  
31  
1
1
0
0
3 2  
1
0
3
2
1 0  
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
7
6
5
4
7
6
5
4
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 6  
Dual-Quad Single bit Wide I/O command without latency  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
31  
31  
1
1
0
0
IO1  
3
2
1
5
0
4
3
2
6
1
5
0
4
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
7
6
7
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Dummy Cycles  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 7  
Dual-Quad Single bit Wide I/O command with latency  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
1
1
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IO2  
IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6  
IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Dummy  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5  
Figure 8  
Notes  
Dual-Quad, Quad Output Read command  
5. Instruction needs to be the same for both IO0 (Quad SPI-1) and IO4 (Quad SPI-2).  
6. A = MSB of address = 23 for 3-byte address, or 31 for 4-byte address.  
Datasheet  
15  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 28  
29  
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
IO2  
30  
IO3  
31  
SIG0  
Phase  
Address  
Instruction  
Mode  
Dummy D1 D2 D3 D4  
Figure 9  
Dual-Quad, Quad I/O command  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
2824201612 8  
2925211713 9  
4
5
0
4
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IO1  
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
IO2  
302622181410 6  
312723191511 7  
IO3  
IO4  
2824201612 8  
2925211713 9  
3026221814 2  
3127231915 3  
Address  
4
5
6
7
IO5  
IO6  
IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Mode  
Dummy  
DLP  
D1D2 D3 D4  
Figure 10  
Dual-Quad DDR Quad I/O Read command  
Additional sequence diagrams, specific to each command, are provided in “Commands” on page 59.  
Notes  
7. Instruction, Address and Mode bits needs to be the same for both IO0–IO3 (Quad SPI-1) and IO4–IO7 (Quad  
SPI-2).  
8. The gray bits are optional, the host does not have to drive bits during that cycle.  
Datasheet  
16  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
4.3  
Interface states  
This section describes the input and output signal levels as related to the SPI interface behavior.  
Table 2  
Dual-Quad interface states summary  
Interface state  
VDD  
SCK  
X
CS#  
X
RESET#  
IO0–IO7  
Power-Off  
Low Power  
< V (low)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CC  
Hardware Data Protection  
< V (cut-off)  
X
X
X
CC  
Power-On (Cold) Reset  
V (min)  
X
HH  
X
X
CC  
Hardware (Warm) Reset Non-Quad Mode  
Hardware (Warm) Reset Quad Mode  
Interface Standby  
V (min)  
X
HL  
HL  
HH  
HH  
CC  
V (min)  
X
HH  
HH  
HL  
CC  
V (min)  
X
CC  
Instruction Cycle (Legacy SPI)  
V (min)  
HT  
CC  
Single Input Cycle  
V (min)  
HT  
HT  
HT  
HL  
HL  
HL  
HH  
HH  
HH  
X
X
X
CC  
Host to Memory Transfer  
Single Latency (Dummy) Cycle  
V (min)  
CC  
Single Output Cycle  
V (min)  
CC  
Memory to Host Transfer  
Quad Input Cycle  
V (min)  
HT  
HT  
HT  
HL  
HL  
HL  
HH  
HH  
HH  
X
X
X
CC  
Host to Memory Transfer  
Quad Latency (Dummy) Cycle  
V (min)  
CC  
Quad Output Cycle  
V (min)  
CC  
Memory to Host Transfer  
DDR Quad Input Cycle  
V (min)  
HT  
HT  
HT  
HL  
HL  
HL  
HH  
HH  
HH  
X
X
X
CC  
Host to Memory Transfer  
DDR Latency (Dummy) Cycle  
V (min)  
CC  
DDR Quad Output Cycle  
Memory to Host Transfer  
V (min)  
CC  
Legend:  
Z
= No driver - floating signal  
HL = Host driving V  
HH = Host driving V  
IL  
IH  
HV = Either HL or HH  
X
= HL or HH or Z  
HT = Toggling between HL and HH  
ML = Memory driving V  
MH = Memory driving V  
MV = Either ML or MH  
IL  
IH  
Datasheet  
17  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
4.3.1  
Power-off  
When the core supply voltage is at or below the VCC (low) voltage, the device is considered to be powered off. The  
device does not react to external signals, and is prevented from performing any program or erase operation.  
4.3.2  
Low power hardware data protection  
When VCC is less than VCC (cut-off), the memory device will ignore commands to ensure that program and erase  
operations can not start when the core supply voltage is out of the operating range.  
4.3.3  
Power-on (cold) reset  
When the core voltage supply remains at or below the VCC (low) voltage for tPD time, then rises to VCC (Minimum)  
the device will begin its power-on reset (POR) process. POR continues until the end of tPU. During tPU, the device  
does not react to external input signals nor drive any outputs. Following the end of tPU, the device transitions to  
the Interface Standby state and can accept commands. For additional information on POR see “Power-on (cold)  
reset” on page 29.  
4.3.4  
Hardware (warm) reset  
Some of the device package options provide a RESET# input. When RESET# is driven LOW for tRP time the device  
starts the hardware reset process. The process continues for tRPH time. Following the end of both tRPH and the  
reset hold time following the rise of RESET# (tRH) the device transitions to the Interface Standby state and can  
accept commands. For additional information on hardware reset see “POR followed by hardware reset” on  
page 29.  
4.3.5  
Interface Standby  
When CS# is HIGH, the SPI interface is in Standby state. Inputs other than RESET# are ignored. The interface waits  
for the beginning of a new command. The next interface state is Instruction Cycle when CS# goes LOW to begin a  
new command.  
While in Interface Standby state the memory device draws standby current (ISB) if no embedded algorithm is in  
progress. If an embedded algorithm is in progress, the related current is drawn until the end of the algorithm  
when the entire device returns to standby current draw.  
4.3.6  
Instruction cycle  
When the host drives the MSB of an instruction and CS# goes LOW, on the next rising edge of SCK the device  
captures the MSB of the instruction that begins the new command. On each following rising edge of SCK, the  
device captures the next lower significance bit of the 8-bit instruction. The host keeps RESET# HIGH, CS# LOW.  
Each instruction selects the address space that is operated on and the transfer format used during the remainder  
of the command. The transfer format may be Single, Quad output, Quad I/O, DDR Single I/O, or DDR Quad I/O.  
The expected next interface state depends on the instruction received.  
Some commands are standalone, needing no address or data transfer to or from the memory. The host returns  
CS# HIGH after the rising edge of SCK for the eighth bit of the instruction in such commands. The next interface  
state in this case is Interface Standby.  
4.3.7  
Single input cycle — Host to Memory transfer  
Several commands transfer information after the instruction on the single serial input (SI) signal from host to the  
memory device. The Quad Output commands send address to the memory using only SI but return read data  
using the I/O signals. The host keeps RESET# HIGH, CS# LOW, HOLD# HIGH, and drives SI as needed for the  
command. The memory does not drive the Serial Output (IO1 and IO5) signals.  
The expected next interface state depends on the instruction. Some instructions continue sending address or  
data to the memory using additional single input cycles. Others may transition to single latency, or directly to  
Single, or Quad Output.  
Datasheet  
18  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
4.3.8  
Single latency (dummy) cycle  
Read commands may have zero to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash  
memory array before transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the latency code in  
the Configuration Register (CR[7:6]). During the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# HIGH, CS# LOW, and SCK  
toggles. The host may drive the IO0 and IO4 signals during these cycles or the host may leave IO0 and IO4 floating.  
The memory does not use any data driven on IO0 and IO4 or other I/O signals during the latency cycles. In Quad  
Read commands, the host must stop driving the I/O signals on the falling edge at the end of the last latency cycle.  
It is recommended that the host stop driving I/O signals during latency cycles so that there is sufficient time for  
the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive at the end of the latency cycles. This prevents driver  
conflict between host and memory when the signal direction changes. The memory does not drive the Serial  
Output (IO0 and IO4) or I/O signals during the latency cycles.  
The next interface state depends on the command structure i.e. the number of latency cycles, and whether the  
read is single, or quad width.  
4.3.9  
Dual-Quad single output cycle — Memory to Host transfer  
Several commands transfer information back to the host on the Serial Outputs (IO1 and IO5) signals. The host  
keeps RESET# HIGH, CS# LOW. The memory ignores the Serial Input (IO0 and IO4) signals. The memory drives IO1  
and IO5 with data.  
The next interface state continues to be dual output cycle until the host returns CS# to HIGH ending the  
command.  
4.3.10  
QPP or QOR address input cycle  
The Quad Page Program and Quad Output Read commands send address to the memory only on IO0 and IO4.  
The other IO signals are ignored because the device must be in Quad mode for these commands thus the Hold  
and Write Protect features are not active. The host keeps RESET# HIGH, CS# LOW, and drives IO0.  
For QPP the next interface state following the delivery of address is the quad input cycle.  
For QOR the next interface state following address is a quad latency cycle if there are latency cycles needed or  
quad output cycle if no latency is required.  
4.3.11  
Quad input cycle — Host to Memory transfer  
The Quad I/O Read command transfers four address or mode bits to the memory in each cycle. The Quad Page  
Program command transfers four data bits to the memory in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# HIGH, CS# LOW,  
and drives the IO signals.  
For Quad I/O Read, the next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a quad latency cycle  
if there are latency cycles needed or quad output cycle if no latency is required. For Quad Page Program the host  
returns CS# HIGH following the delivery of data to be programmed and the interface returns to Standby state.  
4.3.12  
Quad latency (dummy) cycle  
Read commands may have zero to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash  
memory array before transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the latency code in  
the Configuration Register (CR[7:6]). During the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# HIGH, CS# LOW. The host  
may drive the IO signals during these cycles or the host may leave the IO floating. The memory does not use any  
data driven on IO during the latency cycles. The host must stop driving the IO signals on the falling edge at the  
end of the last latency cycle. It is recommended that the host stop driving them during all latency cycles so that  
there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive at the end of the latency  
cycles. This prevents driver conflict between host and memory when the signal direction changes. The memory  
does not drive the IO signals during the latency cycles.  
The next interface state following the last latency cycle is a quad output cycle.  
Datasheet  
19  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
4.3.13  
Quad output cycle — Memory to Host transfer  
The Quad Output Read and Quad I/O Read return data to the host eight bits in each cycle. The host keeps RESET#  
HIGH, and CS# LOW. The memory drives data on IO0–IO3 signals during the quad output cycles.  
The next interface state continues to be quad output cycle until the host returns CS# to HIGH ending the  
command.  
4.3.14  
DDR quad input cycle — Host to Memory transfer  
The DDR Quad I/O Read command sends address, and mode bits to the memory on all the IO signals. Eight bits  
are transferred on the rising edge of SCK and four bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET#  
HIGH, and CS# LOW.  
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a DDR latency cycle.  
4.3.15  
DDR latency cycle  
DDR Read commands may have one to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash  
memory array before transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the latency code in  
the Configuration Register (CR1[7:6]). During the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# HIGH and CS# LOW. The  
host may not drive the IO signals during these cycles. So that there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn  
off before the memory begins to drive. This prevents driver conflict between host and memory when the signal  
direction changes. The memory has an option to drive all the IO signals with a data learning pattern (DLP) during  
the last 4 latency cycles. The DLP option should not be enabled when there are fewer than five latency cycles so  
that there is at least one cycle of high impedance for turn around of the IO signals before the memory begins  
driving the DLP. When there are more than 4 cycles of latency the memory does not drive the IO signals until the  
last four cycles of latency.  
The next interface state following the last latency cycle is a DDR quad output cycle, depending on the instruction.  
4.3.16  
DDR quad output cycle — Memory to Host transfer  
The DDR Quad I/O Read command returns bits to the host on all the IO signals. Eight bits are transferred on the  
rising edge of SCK and four bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# HIGH, and CS# LOW.  
The next interface state continues to be DDR quad output cycle until the host returns CS# to HIGH ending the  
command.  
Datasheet  
20  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
4.4  
Configuration Register effects on the interface  
The Configuration Register bits 7 and 6 (CR1[7:6]) select the latency code for all read commands. The latency code  
selects the number of mode bit and latency cycles for each type of instruction.  
The Configuration Register Bit-1 (CR1[1]) selects whether Quad mode is enabled and allow Quad Page Program,  
Quad Output Read, and Quad I/O Read commands. Quad mode must also be selected to allow Read DDR Quad  
I/O commands. This Quad bit is set to ‘1’ by default for Dual-Quad SPI.  
4.5  
Data protection  
Some basic protection against unintended changes to stored data are provided and controlled purely by the  
hardware design. These are described in the “Data protection” on page 53. Other software managed protection  
methods are discussed in the “Software interface” on page 38 of this document.  
4.5.1  
Power-up  
When the core supply voltage is at or below the VCC (low) voltage, the device is considered to be powered off. The  
device does not react to external signals, and is prevented from performing any program or erase operation.  
Program and erase operations continue to be prevented during the power-on reset because no command is  
accepted until the exit from POR to the Interface Standby state.  
4.5.2  
Low power  
When VCC is less than VCC (cut-off), the memory device will ignore commands to ensure that program and erase  
operations can not start when the core supply voltage is out of the operating range.  
4.5.3  
Clock pulse count  
The device verifies that all program, erase, and Write Registers (WRR) commands consist of a clock pulse count  
that is a multiple of eight before executing them. A command not having a multiple of 8 clock pulse count is  
ignored and no error status is set for the command.  
Datasheet  
21  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
5
Electrical specifications  
5.1  
Absolute maximum ratings  
Table 3  
Absolute maximum ratings  
Storage temperature plastic packages  
–65°C to +150°C  
–65°C to +125°C  
–0.5 V to +4.0 V  
Ambient temperature with power applied  
V
CC  
[9]  
Input Voltage with respect to ground (V )  
–0.5 V to +(V + 0.5 V)  
SS  
IO  
[10]  
Output short circuit current  
100 mA  
5.2  
Thermal resistance  
Table 4  
Parameter  
Thermal resistance  
Description  
Test condition  
ZSA024  
Unit  
Thermal resistance (Junction  
to ambient)  
Theta JA  
Theta JB  
Theta JC  
38  
°C/W  
Test conditions follow standard test methods  
Thermal resistance (Junction and procedures for measuring thermal  
18  
°C/W  
°C/W  
to board)  
impedance in accordance with EIA/JESD51.  
with Still Air (0 m/s).  
Thermal resistance (Junction  
to case)  
13.78  
Notes  
9. See “Input signal overshoot” on page 23 for allowed maximums during signal transition.  
10.No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a time. Duration of the short circuit should not be  
greater than one second.  
11.Stresses above those listed under Absolute maximum ratings may cause permanent damage to the device.  
This is a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those  
indicated in the operational sections of this datasheet is not implied. Exposure of the device to absolute  
maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
Datasheet  
22  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
5.3  
Operating ranges  
Operating ranges define those limits between which the functionality of the device is guaranteed.  
5.3.1  
Temperature ranges  
Table 5  
Recommended operating ranges  
Spec  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Devices  
Unit  
°C  
Min  
–40  
–40  
–40  
–40  
Max  
+85  
Industrial (I)  
[12]  
Industrial Plus (V)  
+105  
+85  
Ambient temperature  
T
A
Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 3 (A)  
Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 2 (B)  
°C  
+105  
5.3.2  
Input signal overshoot  
During DC conditions, input or I/O signals should remain equal to or between VSS and VIO. During voltage  
transitions, inputs or I/Os may overshoot VSS to –2.0 V or overshoot to VCC + 2.0 V, for periods up to 20 ns.  
20 ns  
20 ns  
VIL  
- 2.0V  
20 ns  
Figure 11  
Maximum negative overshoot waveform  
20 ns  
VCC + 2.0V  
VIH  
20 ns  
20 ns  
Figure 12  
Maximum positive overshoot waveform  
Note  
12.Operating and performance parameters will be determined by device characterization and may vary from  
standard industrial temperature range devices as currently shown in this specification.  
Datasheet  
23  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
5.4  
Power-up and power-down  
The device must not be selected at power-up or power-down (that is, CS# must follow the voltage applied on VCC  
until VCC reaches the correct value as follows:  
)
VCC (min) at power-up, and then for a further delay of tPU  
VSS at power-down  
A simple pull-up resistor (generally of the order of 100 k) on Chip Select (CS#) can usually be used to insure safe  
and proper power-up and power-down.  
The device ignores all instructions until a time delay of tPU has elapsed after the moment that VCC rises above the  
minimum VCC threshold (see Figure 13). However, correct operation of the device is not guaranteed if VCC returns  
below VCC (min) during tPU. No command should be sent to the device until the end of tPU  
.
After power-up (tPU), the device is in Standby mode (not Deep Power Down mode), draws CMOS standby current  
(ISB), and the WEL bit is reset.  
During power-down or voltage drops below VCC (cut-off), the voltage must drop below VCC (low) for a period of  
tPD for the part to initialize correctly on power-up (see Figure 14). If during a voltage drop the VCC stays above VCC  
(cut-off) the part will stay initialized and will work correctly when VCC is again above VCC (min). In the event  
power-on reset did not complete correctly after power up, the assertion of the RESET# signal or receiving a  
software reset command (RESET) will restart the POR process.  
Normal precautions must be taken for supply rail decoupling to stabilize the VCC supply at the device. Each device  
in a system should have the VCC rail decoupled by a suitable capacitor close to the package supply connection  
(this capacitor is generally of the order of 0.1 µF).  
Table 6  
Power-up / power-down voltage and timing  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
2.7  
Max  
Unit  
V
V
(min)  
V
V
(minimum operation voltage)  
V
V
CC  
CC  
CC  
CC  
(cut-off)  
(cut 0ff where re-initialization is needed)  
2.4  
V
V
(low voltage for initialization to occur)  
1.0  
2.3  
CC  
CC  
V
(low)  
V
CC  
(low voltage for initialization to occur at embedded)  
t
t
V
V
(min) to Read operation  
(low) time  
300  
µs  
µs  
PU  
CC  
CC  
1.0  
PD  
Datasheet  
24  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
VCC  
(max)  
VCC  
(min)  
VCC  
tPU  
Full Device Access  
Time  
Figure 13  
Power-up  
VCC  
(max)  
VCC  
No Device Access Allowed  
(min)  
VCC  
tPU  
Device Access  
Allowed  
(cut-off)  
VCC  
(low)  
VCC  
tPD  
Time  
Figure 14  
Power-down and voltage drop  
Datasheet  
25  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
5.5  
DC characteristics  
Table 7  
DC characteristics  
Parameter  
[13]  
Symbol  
Test conditions  
Min  
–0.5  
0.7 × V  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V
V
V
V
Input low voltage  
Input high voltage  
Output low voltage  
Output high voltage  
0.2 × V  
V
V
V
V
IL  
CC  
V + 0.4  
CC  
IH  
CC  
I
I
= 1.6 mA, V = V min  
0.15 × V  
OL  
OH  
OL  
CC  
CC  
CC  
= –0.1 mA  
0.85 × V  
OH  
CC  
V
= V max,  
CC  
CC  
IN  
I
I
Input leakage current  
Output leakage current  
±4  
µA  
µA  
LI  
V = V or V  
IH  
IL  
V
V
= V max,  
CC  
CC  
IN  
±4  
32  
LO  
= V or V  
IH  
IL  
Serial SDR @ 50 MHz  
Serial SDR @ 133 MHz  
Quad SDR @ 80 MHz  
Quad SDR @ 104 MHz  
Quad DDR @ 80 MHz  
Outputs unconnected during  
[15]  
66/70  
100  
122  
200  
Active power supply current  
(READ)  
I
mA  
CC1  
[14]  
read data return  
Active power supply current  
(Page Program)  
I
I
I
I
I
CS# = V  
CS# = V  
CS# = V  
CS# = V  
200  
200  
200  
200  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
CC2  
CC3  
CC4  
CC5  
SB  
CC  
CC  
CC  
CC  
Active power supply current  
(WRR)  
Active power supply current  
(SE)  
Active power supply current  
(BE)  
RESET#, CS# = V ;  
CC  
SS  
Standby current  
Standby current  
SI, SCK = V or V ,  
140  
140  
200  
600  
µA  
µA  
CC  
(Industrial)  
Industrial Temperature  
RESET#, CS# = V ;  
CC  
SS  
I
(Industrial  
SB  
SI, SCK = V or V ,  
CC  
Plus)  
Industrial Plus Temperature  
5.5.1  
Active power and standby power modes  
The device is enabled and in the Active Power mode when Chip Select (CS#) is LOW. When CS# is HIGH, the device  
is disabled, but may still be in an Active Power mode until all program, erase, and write operations have  
completed. The device then goes into the Standby Power mode, and power consumption drops to ISB  
.
Notes  
13.Typical values are at TAI = 25°C and VCC = 3 V.  
14.Outputs switching current is not included.  
15.Industrial temperature range / Industrial Plus temperature range.  
Datasheet  
26  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
6
Timing specifications  
6.1  
Key to switching waveforms  
High Impedance  
Any change permitted  
Valid at logic high or low  
Input  
Symbol  
Output  
Logic High Logic Low  
Logic High Logic Low  
High Impedance  
Valid at logic high or low  
Changing, state unknown  
Figure 15  
Waveform element meanings  
Input Levels  
+ 0.4V  
Output Levels  
0.85 x V  
V
CC  
CC  
0.7 x V  
0.5 x V  
0.2 x V  
CC  
CC  
CC  
Timing Reference Level  
0.15 x V  
CC  
- 0.5V  
Figure 16  
Input, output, and timing reference levels  
Datasheet  
27  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
6.2  
AC test conditions  
Device  
Under  
Test  
C
L
Figure 17  
Test setup  
Table 8  
Symbol  
AC measurement conditions  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
30  
C
Load capacitance  
pF  
[19]  
L
15  
Input rise and fall times  
Input pulse voltage  
2.4  
ns  
V
0.2 × V to 0.8 × V  
CC  
CC  
Input timing ref voltage  
Output timing ref voltage  
0.5 × V  
0.5 × V  
V
CC  
CC  
V
6.2.1  
Capacitance characteristics  
Table 9  
Symbol  
Capacitance  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
1 MHz  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
pF  
C
C
Input capacitance (applies to SCK, CS#, RESET#)  
Output capacitance (applies to All I/O)  
10  
10  
IN  
1 MHz  
pF  
OUT  
Notes  
16.Output High-Z is defined as the point where data is no longer driven.  
17.Input slew rate: 1.5 V/ns.  
18.AC characteristics tables assume clock and data signals have the same slew rate (slope).  
19.DDR Operation.  
20.For more information on capacitance, please consult the IBIS models.  
Datasheet  
28  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
6.3  
Reset  
6.3.1  
Power-on (cold) reset  
The device executes a POR process until a time delay of tPU has elapsed after the moment that VCC rises above  
the minimum VCC threshold. See Figure 13, Table 6, and Table 10. The device must not be selected (CS# to go  
HIGH with VIO) during power-up (tPU), i.e. no commands may be sent to the device until the end of tPU. RESET# is  
ignored during POR. If RESET# is LOW during POR and remains LOW through and beyond the end of tPU, CS# must  
remain HIGH until tRH after RESET# returns HIGH. RESET# must return HIGH for greater than tRS before returning  
LOW to initiate a hardware reset.  
VCC  
VIO  
tPU  
If RESET# is low at tPU end  
CS# must be high at tPU end  
RESET#  
tRH  
CS#  
Figure 18  
Reset LOW at the end of POR  
VCC  
tPU  
tPU  
RESET#  
CS#  
If RESET# is high at tPU end  
CS# may stay high or go low at tPU end  
Figure 19  
Reset HIGH at the end of POR  
VCC  
tPU  
tPU  
tRS  
RESET#  
CS#  
Figure 20  
POR followed by hardware reset  
Datasheet  
29  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
6.3.2  
Hardware (warm) reset  
When the RESET# input transitions from VIH to VIL the device will reset register states in the same manner as POR  
but, does not go through the full reset process that is performed during POR. The hardware reset process requires  
a period of tRPH to complete. If the POR process did not complete correctly for any reason during power-up (tPU),  
RESET# going LOW will initiate the full POR process instead of the hardware reset process and will require tPU to  
complete the POR process.  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the flash memory device to Standby state.  
• RESET# must be HIGH for tRS following tPU or tRPH, before going LOW again to initiate a hardware reset.  
• When RESET# is driven LOW for at least a minimum period of time (tRP), the device terminates any operation in  
progress, tri-states all outputs, and ignores all read/write commands for the duration of tRPH. The device resets  
the interface to standby state.  
• If CS# is LOW at the time RESET# is asserted, CS# must return HIGH during tRPH before it can be asserted LOW  
again after tRH  
.
tRP  
Any prior reset  
tRPH  
RESET#  
CS#  
tRH  
tRH  
tRS  
tRPH  
Figure 21  
Hardware reset  
Table 10  
Hardware reset parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Limit  
Min  
Time  
50  
Unit  
ns  
t
t
t
t
Reset setup — prior reset end and RESET# HIGH before RESET# LOW  
Reset pulse hold — RESET# LOW to CS# LOW  
RESET# pulse width  
RS  
Min  
35  
µs  
RPH  
RP  
Min  
200  
50  
ns  
Reset hold — RESET# HIGH before CS# LOW  
Min  
ns  
RH  
Notes  
21.RESET# LOW is optional and ignored during power-up (tPU). If RESET# is asserted during the end of tPU, the  
device will remain in the Reset state and tRH will determine when CS# may go LOW.  
22.Sum of tRP and tRH must be equal to or greater than tRPH  
.
Datasheet  
30  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
6.4  
SDR AC characteristics  
Table 11  
AC characteristics (VCC 2.7 V to 3.6 V)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
F
F
SCK clock frequency for READ and 4READ instructions  
DC  
50  
MHz  
SCK, R  
SCK clock frequency for single commands  
DC  
133  
104  
MHz  
as shown in Table 38 [27]  
SCK, C  
SCK clock frequency for the following Dual and Quad  
commands: QOR, 4QOR, QIOR, 4QIOR  
F
F
DC  
DC  
MHz  
MHz  
SCK, C  
SCK clock frequency for the QPP, 4QPP commands  
SCK clock period  
80  
SCK, QPP  
P
1/ F  
SCK  
SCK  
[23]  
t
t
t
t
, t  
Clock HIGH time  
45% P  
45% P  
0.1  
ns  
ns  
WH CH  
SCK  
SCK  
[23]  
, t  
Clock LOW time  
WL CL  
, t  
Clock rise time (slew rate)  
Clock fall time (slew rate)  
V/ns  
V/ns  
CRT CLCH  
, t  
0.1  
CFT CHCL  
CS# HIGH time (read instructions)  
CS# HIGH time (program/erase)  
10  
50  
t
ns  
CS  
t
t
t
t
CS# active setup time (relative to SCK)  
CS# active hold time (relative to SCK)  
Data in setup time  
3
3
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CSS  
CSH  
SU  
[24]  
1.5  
2
3000  
Data in hold time  
HD  
[25]  
[26]  
[27]  
8.0  
7.65  
6.5  
t
Clock LOW to output valid  
0
ns  
V
t
t
Output hold time  
2
0
8
8
8
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
HO  
Output disable time  
DIS  
[28]  
t
WP# setup time  
20  
WPS  
WPH  
HLCH  
CHHH  
HHCH  
CHHL  
HZ  
[28]  
t
WP# hold time  
100  
t
t
t
t
t
t
HOLD# active setup time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# active hold time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# non active setup time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# non active hold time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# enable to output invalid  
HOLD# disable to output valid  
3
3
3
3
LZ  
Notes  
23.±10% duty cycle is supported for frequencies 50 MHz.  
24.Maximum value only applies during Program/Erase Suspend/Resume commands.  
25.Full VCC range (2.7 V–3.6 V) and CL = 30 pF.  
26.Regulated VCC range (3.0 V–3.6 V) and CL = 30 pF.  
27.Regulated VCC range (3.0 V–3.6 V) and CL = 15 pF.  
28.Only applicable as a constraint for WRR instruction when SRWD is set to ‘1.  
Datasheet  
31  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
6.4.1  
Clock timing  
PSCK  
tCH  
tCL  
VIH min  
VCC / 2  
VIL max  
tCFT  
tCRT  
Figure 22  
Clock timing  
6.4.2  
Input / output timing  
tCS  
CS#  
tCSS  
tCSH  
tCSS  
SCK  
tSU  
tHD  
tLZ  
tHO  
tV  
tDIS  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
MSB OUT.  
LSB OUT  
IO  
Figure 23  
SPI SDR dual-quad timing  
Datasheet  
32  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
6.5  
DDR AC characteristics  
Table 12  
AC characteristics DDR operation  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
DC  
Typ  
Max  
80  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
F
SCK clock frequency for DDR READ instruction  
SCK clock period for DDR READ instruction  
Clock HIGH time  
SCK, R  
P
10.75  
SCK, R  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
, t  
45% P  
45% P  
10  
ns  
WH CH  
SCK  
SCK  
, t  
Clock LOW time  
ns  
WL CL  
CS# HIGH time (Read Instructions)  
CS# active setup time (relative to SCK)  
CS# active hold time (relative to SCK)  
IO in setup time  
ns  
CS  
3
ns  
CSS  
CSH  
SU  
3
ns  
[29]  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
3000  
ns  
IO in hold time  
ns  
HD  
[30]  
Clock LOW to output valid  
Output hold time  
6.5  
ns  
V
ns  
HO  
Output disable time  
8
8
ns  
DIS  
LZ  
Clock to output LOW impedance  
First output to last output data valid time  
0
ns  
600  
ps  
O_SKEW  
Notes  
29.Maximum value only applies during Program/Erase Suspend/Resume commands.  
30.Regulated VCC range (3.0 V–3.6 V) and CL = 15 pF.  
Datasheet  
33  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
6.5.1  
DDR input timing  
tCS  
CS#  
tCSH  
tCSH  
tCSS  
tCSS  
SCK  
tHD  
tSU  
tHD  
tSU  
IO  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
Figure 24  
SPI DDR input timing  
6.5.2  
DDR output timing  
tCS  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
tLZ  
tHO  
tV  
tV  
tDIS  
IO  
MSB  
LSB  
Figure 25  
SPI DDR output timing  
Datasheet  
34  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
PSCK  
tCL  
tCH  
SCK  
tV  
tV  
tOTT  
tO_SKEW  
Slow  
D1  
Slow  
D2  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
Fast  
D1  
Fast  
D2  
IO3  
D1  
Valid  
D2  
Valid  
IO_valid  
tDV  
tDV  
Figure 26  
SPI DDR data valid window  
Notes  
31.tCLH is the shorter duration of tCL or tCH  
.
32.tO_SKEW is the maximum difference (delta) between the minimum and maximum tV (output valid) across all  
IO signals.  
33.tOTT is the maximum output transition time from one valid data value to the next valid data value on each IO.  
34.tOTT is dependent on system level considerations including:  
a. Memory device output impedance (drive strength).  
b. System level parasitics on the IOs (primarily bus capacitance).  
c. Host memory controller input VIH and VIL levels at which 0 to 1 and 1 to 0 transitions are recognized.  
d. As an example, assuming that the above considerations result a memory output slew rate of 2 V/ns and a  
3 V transition (from 1 to 0 or 0 to 1) is required by the host, the tOTT would be:  
tOTT = 3 V/(2 V/ns) = 1.5 ns  
e. tOTT is not a specification tested by Infineon, it is system dependent and must be derived by the system  
designer based on the above considerations.  
35.The minimum data valid window (tDV) can be calculated as follows:  
a. As an example, assuming:  
i. 80 MHz clock frequency = 12.5 ns clock period  
ii. DDR operations are specified to have a duty cycle of 45% or higher  
iii. tCLH = 0.45 × PSCK = 0.45 × 12.5 ns = 5.625 ns  
iv. tO_SKEW = 600 ps  
v. tOTT = 1.5 ns  
b. tDV = tCLH – tO_SKEW – tOTT  
c. tDV = 5.625 ns – 600 ps – 1.5 ns = 3.525 ns  
Datasheet  
35  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Physical interface  
7
Physical interface  
Table 13  
Model specific connections  
Versatile I/O or V – V functionality is not supported on S79FL01GS. This signal must be tied to V on  
CC  
IO  
CC  
V
/ V  
CC  
IO  
the PCB.  
RESET# signal is bonded out and active on the S79FL01GS. The signal has an internal pull-up resistor and  
may be left unconnected in the host system if not used.  
RESET#  
7.1  
Dual-Quad 24-ball BGA package (ZSA024)  
Connection diagram  
7.1.1  
1
2
3
4
5
A
B
C
D
E
RFU  
SCK1  
CS1#  
IO1  
CS2# RESET# RFU  
SCK2  
VSS  
RFU  
IO7  
VSS  
RFU  
IO0  
VCC  
IO2  
RFU  
RFU  
IO4  
IO3  
IO6  
IO5  
VIO/VCC VSS  
Figure 27  
Dual-Quad 24-ball BGA, 5 x 5 ball footprint (ZSA024), top view  
Notes  
36.Refer to Table 1 for signal descriptions.  
37.The RESET# input has an internal pull-up and may be left unconnected in the system.  
Datasheet  
36  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Physical interface  
7.1.2  
Physical diagram  
NOTES:  
DIMENSIONS  
SYMBOL  
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
MIN.  
-
NOM.  
MAX.  
1.20  
-
A
A1  
D
-
2. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JEP95, SECTION 3, SPP-020.  
0.20  
-
8.00 BSC  
6.00 BSC  
4.00 BSC  
4.00 BSC  
5
4.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
E
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D" DIRECTION.  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "E" DIRECTION.  
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULATED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS FOR MATRIX SIZE  
MD X ME.  
D1  
E1  
MD  
ME  
n
5
24  
6
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL DIAMETER IN A PLANE  
PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
b
0.35  
0.40  
0.45  
eD  
eE  
SD  
SE  
1.00 BSC  
1.00 BSC  
0.00  
7
"SD" AND "SE" ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A AND B AND DEFINE  
THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW,  
0.00  
"SD" OR "SE" = 0.  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW,  
"SD" = eD/2 AND "SE" = eE/2.  
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED BALLS.  
9. A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK MARK,  
METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
002-15078 **  
SEMICONDUCTOR CORPORATION THIS DRAWING IS RECEIVED IN CONFIDENCE AND ITS CONTENTS  
002 15078  
ZSA024  
Figure 28  
24-ball FBGA (8.0 × 6.0 × 1.2 mm) package outline, 002-15078  
7.1.3  
Special handling instructions for FBGA packages  
Flash memory devices in BGA packages may be damaged if exposed to ultrasonic cleaning methods. The package  
and/or data integrity may be compromised if the package body is exposed to temperatures above 150°C for  
prolonged periods of time.  
Datasheet  
37  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8
Address space maps  
Overview  
8.1  
8.1.1  
Extended address  
The S79FL01GS device supports 32-bit addresses to enable higher density devices than allowed by previous  
generation (legacy) SPI devices that supported only 24-bit addresses. A 24-bit byte resolution address can access  
only 16 Mbytes (128 Mbits) of maximum density. A 32-bit byte resolution address allows direct addressing of up  
to a 4 Gbytes (32 Gbits) of address space.  
Legacy commands continue to support 24-bit addresses for backward software compatibility. Extended 32-bit  
addresses are enabled in three ways:  
• Bank Address register — a software (command) loadable internal register that supplies the high order bits of  
address when legacy 24-bit addresses are in use.  
• Extended Address mode — a bank address register bit that changes all legacy commands to expect 32 bits of  
address supplied from the host system.  
• New commands — that perform both legacy and new functions, which expect 32-bit address.  
The default condition at power-up and after reset, is the Bank address register loaded with zeros and the  
extended address mode set for 24-bit addresses. This enables legacy software compatible access to the first  
128 Mbits of a device.  
8.1.2  
Multiple address spaces  
Many commands operate on the main flash memory array. Some commands operate on address spaces separate  
from the main flash array. Each separate address space uses the full 32-bit address but may only define a small  
portion of the available address space.  
8.2  
Flash memory array  
The main flash array is divided into erase units called sectors. The sectors are organized as uniform 512-kbyte  
sectors.  
Table 14  
S79FL01GS sector and memory address map, uniform 512-kbyte sectors  
Sector size (kbyte)  
Sector count  
Sector range  
Address range (8-bit)  
00000000h–0003FFFFh  
:
Notes  
Sector starting  
address  
SA00  
:
512  
256  
Sector ending  
address  
SA255  
03FC0000h–03FFFFFFh  
Note: This is a condensed table that uses a sector as a reference. There are address ranges that are not explicitly  
listed. All 512-kB sectors have the pattern XXXX0000h–XXXXFFFFh.  
8.3  
ID-CFI address space  
The RDIDJ command (9Fh) reads information from a separate flash memory address space for device  
identification (ID) and common flash interface (CFI) information. See “Device ID and common flash interface  
(ID-CFI) address map” on page 113 for the tables defining the contents of the ID-CFI address space. The ID-CFI  
address space is programmed by Infineon and read-only for the host system.  
Datasheet  
38  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.4  
JEDEC JESD216 serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) space  
The RSFDP command (5Ah) reads information from a separate Flash memory address space for device  
identification, feature, and configuration information, in accord with the JEDEC JESD216 standard for serial flash  
discoverable parameters. The ID-CFI address space is incorporated as one of the SFDP parameters.  
See “Serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) address map” on page 109 for the table defining the  
contents of the SFDP address space. The SFDP address space is programmed by Infineon and is read-only for the  
host system  
8.5  
OTP address space  
Each S79FL01GS memory device has a 2048-byte one time program (OTP) address space that is separate from  
the main flash array. The OTP area is divided into 64, individually lockable, 32-byte aligned and length regions.  
In the 64-byte region starting at address zero:  
• The 16 lowest address bytes are programmed by Infineon with a 128-bit random number. Only Infineon is able  
to program these bytes.  
• The next 4 higher address bytes (OTP lock bytes) are used to provide one bit per OTP region to permanently  
protect each region from programming. The bytes are erased when shipped from Infineon. After an OTP region  
is programmed, it can be locked to prevent further programming, by programming the related protection bit  
in the OTP lock bytes.  
• The next higher 12 bytes of the lowest address region are Reserved for Future Use (RFU). The bits in these RFU  
bytes may be programmed by the host system but it must be understood that a future device may use those  
bits for protection of a larger OTP space. The bytes are erased when shipped from Infineon.  
The remaining regions are erased when shipped from Infineon, and are available for programming of additional  
permanent data.  
Refer to Figure 29 for a pictorial representation of the OTP memory space.  
The OTP memory space is intended for increased system security. OTP values, such as the random number  
programmed by Infineon, can be used to “mate” a flash component with the system CPU/ASIC to prevent device  
substitution.  
The configuration register FREEZE (CR1[0]) bit protects the entire OTP memory space from programming when  
set to ‘1. This allows trusted boot code to control programming of OTP regions then set the FREEZE bit to prevent  
further OTP memory space programming during the remainder of normal power-on system operation.  
During the programming of each OTP region, bits 0–3 are programmed on Quad SPI-1 via IO0–IO3, and bits 4–7  
are programmed on Quad SPI-2 via IO4–IO7.  
Quad SPI-2  
Quad SPI-1  
32-byte OTP Region 31  
32-byte OTP Region 30  
32-byte OTP Region 31  
32-byte OTP Region 30  
32-byte OTP Region 29  
32-byte OTP Region 29  
.
.
.
.
.
.
When programmed to  
0‘ each lock bit  
protects its related 32  
byte region from any  
further programming  
When programmed to  
0‘ each lock bit  
protects its related 32  
byte region from any  
further programming  
32-byte OTP Region 3  
32-byte OTP Region 3  
32-byte OTP Region 2  
32-byte OTP Region 1  
32-byte OTP Region 0  
32-byte OTP Region 2  
32-byte OTP Region 1  
32-byte OTP Region 0  
...  
Lock Bits 31 to 0  
...  
Lock Bits 31 to 0  
{
Reserved  
Lock Bytes  
16-byte Random Number  
Byte 0  
Reserved  
Lock Bytes  
16-byte Random Number  
Byte 0  
Contents of Region 0  
Contents of Region 0  
{
Byte 1F  
Byte 10  
Byte 1F  
Byte 10  
Figure 29  
OTP address space — Quad SPI-1 and Quad SPI-2  
Datasheet  
39  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
Table 15  
OTP address map for Quad SPI-1 and Quad SPI-2  
Region  
Byte address range (Hex)  
Contents  
Initial delivery state (Hex)  
Least Significant Byte of  
Infineon programmed random  
number  
000  
...  
Infineon programmed random  
number  
...  
Most Significant Byte of  
Infineon programmed random  
number  
00F  
Region 0  
Region Locking Bits  
Byte 10 [bit 0] locks region 0  
from programming when = 0  
...  
[38]  
010 to 013  
All bytes = FF  
Byte 13 [bit 7] locks region 31  
from programming when = 0  
014 to 01F  
020 to 03F  
Reserved for Future Use (RFU)  
All bytes = FF  
All bytes = FF  
Available for user  
programming  
Region 1  
Region 2  
...  
Available for user  
programming  
040 to 05F  
...  
All bytes = FF  
All bytes = FF  
All bytes = FF  
Available for user  
programming  
Available for user  
programming  
Region 31  
7E0 to 7FF  
Note  
38.It is recommended that the Lock Bytes for Quad SPI-1 and Quad SPI-2 be programmed with identical data.  
Datasheet  
40  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6  
Registers  
Registers are small groups of memory cells used to configure how the S79FL01GS memory device operates or to  
report the status of device operations. The registers are accessed by specific commands. The commands (and  
hexadecimal instruction codes) used for each register are noted in each register description.  
The S79FL01GS Dual-Quad SPI device has a register of each type, one for each individual die. These include the  
Status Register 1, Status Register 2, Configuration Register, AutoBoot Register, Bank Address Register, ASP  
Register, Password Register, PPB Lock Register, PPB Access Register, DYB Access Register, and DDR Data Learning  
Registers. Each register must be accessed by a command given in parallel to IO0–IO3 (Quad SPI-1) and for  
IO4–IO7 (Quad SPI-2). Reading and writing to each of these registers must also be done in parallel for IO0–IO3  
(Quad SPI-1) and for IO4–IO7 (Quad SPI-2).  
The individual register bits may be volatile, nonvolatile, or one time programmable (OTP). The type for each bit  
is noted in each register description. The default state shown for each bit refers to the state after power-on reset,  
hardware reset, or software reset if the bit is volatile. If the bit is nonvolatile or OTP, the default state is the value  
of the bit when the device is shipped from Infineon. Nonvolatile bits have the same cycling (erase and program)  
endurance as the main flash array.  
Table 16  
Register descriptions  
Register  
Abbreviation  
SR1[7:0]  
Type  
Volatile  
Volatile  
RFU  
Bit location  
Status Register 1  
7:0  
7:0  
7:0  
31:0  
7:0  
7:0  
15:1  
0
Configuration Register 1  
Status Register 2  
AutoBoot Register  
Bank Address Register  
ECC Status Register  
ASP Register  
CR1[7:0]  
SR2[7:0]  
ABRD[31:0]  
BRAC[7:0]  
ECCSR[7:0]  
ASPR[15:1]  
ASPR[0]  
Nonvolatile  
Volatile  
Volatile  
OTP  
ASP Register  
RFU  
Password Register  
PPB Lock Register  
PASS[63:0]  
PPBL[7:1]  
Nonvolatile OTP  
Volatile  
63:0  
7:1  
Volatile  
PPB Lock Register  
PPBL[0]  
0
Read Only  
PPB Access Register  
PPBAR[7:0]  
DYBAR[7:0]  
NVDLR[7:0]  
VDLR[7:0]  
Nonvolatile  
Volatile  
7:0  
7:0  
7:0  
7:0  
DYB Access Register  
SPI DDR Data Learning Registers  
SPI DDR Data Learning Registers  
Nonvolatile  
Volatile  
Datasheet  
41  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6.1  
Status Register 1 (SR1)  
Related Commands: Read Status Register (RDSR1 05h), Write Registers (WRR 01h), Write Enable (WREN 06h),  
Write Disable (WRDI 04h), Clear Status Register (CLSR 30h).  
Table 17  
Bits  
Status Register 1 (SR1)  
Function  
Field  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
1 = Locks state of SRWD, BP, and Configuration  
Register bits when WP# is LOW by ignoring  
WRR command  
Status Register Write  
Disable  
7
SRWD  
Nonvolatile  
0
0 = No protection, even when WP# is LOW  
Programming Error Volatile, Read  
1 = Error occurred  
0 = No Error  
6
5
P_ERR  
E_ERR  
0
0
Occurred  
only  
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = Error occurred  
0 = No Error  
Erase Error Occurred  
4
3
BP2  
BP1  
1
Volatile  
if CR1[3] = 1,  
0
if CR1[3] = 1,  
Nonvolatile  
if CR1[3] = 0  
Protects selected range of sectors (Block)  
from Program or Erase.  
Block Protection  
Write Enable Latch  
Write in Progress  
whenshipped  
from Infineon  
2
BP0  
1 = Device accepts Write Registers (WRR),  
Program or Erase commands  
0 = Device ignores Write Registers (WRR),  
Program or Erase commands  
1
WEL  
Volatile  
0
0
This bit is not affected by WRR, only WREN and  
WRDI commands affect this bit.  
1 = Device Busy, a Write Registers (WRR),  
program, erase or other operation is in  
progress  
Volatile, Read  
only  
0
WIP  
0 = Ready Device is in Standby mode and can  
accept commands  
The Status Register contains both status and control bits:  
Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) SR1[7]: Places the device in the Hardware Protected mode when this bit  
is set to ‘1’ and the WP# input is driven LOW. In this mode, the SRWD, BP2, BP1, and BP0 bits of the Status Register  
become read-only bits and the Write Registers (WRR) command is no longer accepted for execution. If WP# is  
HIGH, the SRWD bit and BP bits may be changed by the WRR command. If SRWD is ‘0, WP# has no effect and the  
SRWD bit and BP bits may be changed by the WRR command. The SRWD bit has the same nonvolatile endurance  
as the main flash array.  
Program Error (P_ERR) SR1[6]: The Program Error Bit is used as a program operation success or failure  
indication. When the Program Error bit is set to ‘1, it indicates that there was an error in the last program  
operation. This bit will also be set when the user attempts to program within a protected main memory sector or  
locked OTP region. When the Program Error bit is set to ‘1, this bit can be reset to ‘0’ with the Clear Status Register  
(CLSR) command. This is a read-only bit and is not affected by the WRR command.  
Erase Error (E_ERR) SR1[5]: The Erase Error Bit is used as an Erase operation success or failure indication. When  
the Erase Error bit is set to ‘1, it indicates that there was an error in the last erase operation. This bit will also be  
set when the user attempts to erase an individual protected main memory sector. The Bulk Erase command will  
not set E_ERR if a protected sector is found during the command execution. When the Erase Error bit is set to ‘1,  
this bit can be reset to ‘0’ with the Clear Status Register (CLSR) command. This is a read-only bit and is not affected  
by the WRR command.  
Datasheet  
42  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
Block Protection (BP2, BP1, BP0) SR1[4:2]: These bits define the main flash array area to be software-protected  
against program and erase commands. The BP bits are either volatile or nonvolatile, depending on the state of  
the BP nonvolatile bit (BPNV) in the configuration register. When one or more of the BP bits is set to ‘1, the  
relevant memory area is protected against program and erase. The Bulk Erase (BE) command can be executed  
only when the BP bits are cleared to 0’s. See “Block protection” on page 54 for a description of how the BP bit  
values select the memory array area protected. The BP bits have the same nonvolatile endurance as the main  
flash array.  
Write Enable Latch (WEL) SR1[1]: The WEL bit must be set to ‘1’ to enable program, write, or erase operations  
as a means to provide protection against inadvertent changes to memory or register values. The Write Enable  
(WREN) command execution sets the Write Enable Latch to ‘1’ to allow any program, erase, or write commands  
to execute afterwards. The Write Disable (WRDI) command can be used to set the Write Enable Latch to ‘0’ to  
prevent all program, erase, and write commands from execution. The WEL bit is cleared to ‘0’ at the end of any  
successful program, write, or erase operation. Following a failed operation the WEL bit may remain set and  
should be cleared with a WRDI command following a CLSR command. After a power down/power up sequence,  
hardware reset, or software reset, the Write Enable Latch is set to ‘0. The WRR command does not affect this bit.  
Write In Progress (WIP) SR1[0]: Indicates whether the device is performing a program, write, erase operation,  
or any other operation, during which a new operation command will be ignored. When the bit is set to ‘1, the  
device is busy performing an operation. While WIP is ‘1, only Read Status (RDSR1 or RDSR2), Erase Suspend  
(ERSP), Program Suspend (PGSP), Clear Status Register (CLSR), and Software Reset (RESET) commands may be  
accepted. ERSP and PGSP will only be accepted if memory array erase or program operations are in progress. The  
status register E_ERR and P_ERR bits are updated while WIP = 1. When P_ERR or E_ERR bits are set to ‘1, the WIP  
bit will remain set to one indicating the device remains busy and unable to receive new operation commands. A  
Clear Status Register (CLSR) command must be received to return the device to standby mode. When the WIP bit  
is cleared to 0 no operation is in progress. This is a read-only bit.  
Datasheet  
43  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6.2  
Configuration Register 1 (CR1)  
Related Commands: Read Configuration Register (RDCR 35h), Write Registers (WRR 01h). The Configuration  
Register bits can be changed using the WRR command with sixteen input cycles.  
The Configuration Register controls certain interface and data protection functions.  
Table 18  
Bits  
Configuration Register 1 (CR1)  
Default  
state  
Field name  
Function  
Type  
Description  
7
6
LC1  
LC0  
0
0
Selects number of initial read latency cycles  
See Table 19 and Table 20  
Latency Code  
Nonvolatile  
Configures Start of  
Block Protection  
1 = BP starts at bottom (Low address)  
0 = BP starts at top (High address)  
5
4
3
2
TBPROT  
DNU  
OTP  
DNU  
OTP  
RFU  
0
0
0
0
DNU  
Do Not Use  
Configures BP2–0 in  
Status Register  
1 = Volatile  
BPNV  
RFU  
0 = Nonvolatile  
RFU  
Reserved for Future Use  
1 = Quad  
Puts the device into  
Quad I/O operation  
For the S79FL01GS Dual-Quad SPI device, the  
default state is set for QUAD and cannot be  
changed.  
1
QUAD  
Nonvolatile  
1
Lock current state of  
BP2–0 bits in Status  
Register, TBPROT in  
Configuration  
1 = Block Protection and OTP locked  
0 = Block Protection and OTP unlocked  
0
FREEZE  
Volatile  
0
Register, and OTP  
regions  
Latency Code (LC) CR1[7:6]: The Latency Code selects the number of mode and dummy cycles between the end  
of address and the start of read data output for all read commands.  
Some read commands send mode bits following the address to indicate that the next command will be of the  
same type with an implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command thus does not provide an  
instruction byte, only a new address and mode bits. This reduces the time needed to send each command when  
the same command type is repeated in a sequence of commands.  
Dummy cycles provide additional latency that is needed to complete the initial read access of the flash array  
before data can be returned to the host system. Some read commands require additional latency cycles as the  
SCK frequency is increased.  
The following latency code tables provide different latency settings that are configured by Infineon.  
Where mode or latency (dummy) cycles are shown in the tables as a dash, that read command is not supported  
at the frequency shown. Read is supported only up to 50 MHz but the same latency value is assigned in each  
latency code and the command may be used when the device is operated at 50 MHz with any latency code  
setting. Similarly, only the Fast Read command is supported up to 133 MHz but the same 10b latency code is used  
for Fast Read up to 133 MHz and for the other dual and quad read commands up to 104 MHz. It is not necessary  
to change the latency code from a higher to a lower frequency when operating at lower frequencies where a  
particular command is supported. The latency code values for a higher frequency can be used for accesses at  
lower frequencies.  
The Enhanced High Performance settings provide latency options the same or faster than additional alternate  
source SPI memories.  
Datasheet  
44  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
Read DDR Data Learning Pattern (DLP) bits may be placed within the dummy cycles immediately before the start  
of read data, if there are five or more dummy cycles. See “Read Memory Array commands” on page 80 for more  
information on the DLP.  
Table 19  
Latency codes for SDR enhanced high performance  
Read  
Fast Read  
(0Bh, 0Ch)  
Read Quad Out  
(6Bh, 6Ch)  
Quad I/O Read  
(EBh, ECh)  
Freq.  
LC  
(03h, 13h)  
(MHz)  
Mode  
Dummy  
Mode  
Dummy  
Mode  
Dummy  
Mode  
Dummy  
50  
80  
90  
11  
00  
01  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
8
8
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
8
8
8
2
2
2
4
4
5
104 10  
133 10  
Table 20  
Latency codes for DDR enhanced high performance  
DDR Quad I/O Read  
(EDh, EEh)  
Freq. (MHz)  
LC  
Mode  
Dummy  
50  
80  
11  
00  
1
1
3
7
Note  
39.When using DDR I/O commands with the data learning pattern (DLP) enabled, a latency code that provides  
five or more dummy cycles should be selected to allow one cycle of additional time for the host to stop  
driving before the memory starts driving the four cycle DLP. So it is recommended to use LC 00 for DDR Quad  
IO Read, if the data learning pattern (DLP) for DDR is used.  
Datasheet  
45  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
Top or Bottom Protection (TBPROT) CR1[5]: This bit defines the operation of the Block Protection bits BP2,  
BP1, and BP0 in the Status Register. As described in the status register section, the BP2–0 bits allow the user to  
optionally protect a portion of the array, ranging from 1/64, 1/4, 1/2, etc., up to the entire array. When TBPROT is  
set to ‘0, the Block Protection is defined to start from the top (maximum address) of the array. When TBPROT is  
set to ‘1, the Block Protection is defined to start from the bottom (zero address) of the array. The TBPROT bit is  
OTP and set to ‘0’ when shipped from Infineon. If TBPROT is programmed to ‘1, an attempt to change it back to  
‘0’ will fail and set the Program Error bit (P_ERR in SR1[6]).  
The desired state of TBPROT must be selected during the initial configuration of the device during system  
manufacture; before the first program or erase operation on the main flash array. TBPROT must not be  
programmed after programming or erasing is done in the main flash array.  
CR1[4]: Reserved for Future Use  
Block Protection Nonvolatile (BPNV) CR1[3]: The BPNV bit defines whether or not the BP2–0 bits in the Status  
Register are volatile or nonvolatile. The BPNV bit is OTP and cleared to a0 with the BP bits cleared to 000 when  
shipped from Infineon. When BPNV is set to ‘0, the BP2–0 bits in the Status Register are nonvolatile. When BPNV  
is set to ‘1, the BP2–0 bits in the Status Register are volatile and will be reset to binary 111 after POR, hardware  
reset, or command reset. If BPNV is programmed to ‘1, an attempt to change it back to ‘0’ will fail and set the  
Program Error bit (P_ERR in SR1[6]).  
CR1[2]: Reserved for Future Use.  
Quad Data Width (QUAD) CR1[1]: When set to ‘1, this bit switches the data width of the device to 4-bit Quad  
mode. The commands for Serial Read still function normally. The QUAD bit in the S79FL01GS device is factory set  
to ‘1’ and should not be changed.  
Freeze Protection (FREEZE) CR1[0]: The Freeze Bit, when set to ‘1, locks the current state of the BP2–0 bits in  
Status Register, the TBPROT and TBPARM bits in the Configuration Register, and the OTP address space. This  
prevents writing, programming, or erasing these areas. As long as the FREEZE bit remains cleared to logic 0 the  
other bits of the Configuration Register, including FREEZE, are writable, and the OTP address space is  
programmable. Once the FREEZE bit has been written to a logic 1 it can only be cleared to a logic 0 by a power-off  
to power-on cycle or a hardware reset. Software reset will not affect the state of the FREEZE bit. The FREEZE bit  
is volatile and the default state of FREEZE after power-on is ‘0. The FREEZE bit can be set in parallel with updating  
other values in CR1 by a single WRR command.  
Datasheet  
46  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6.3  
Status Register 2 (SR2)  
Related Commands: Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h).  
Table 21 Status Register 2 (SR2)  
Default  
state  
Bits Fieldname  
Function  
Type  
Description  
Reserved for Future Use  
7
6
5
4
3
2
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = In Erase Suspend mode  
1
0
ES  
PS  
Erase Suspend  
0
0
0 = Not in Erase Suspend mode  
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = In Program Suspend mode  
Program Suspend  
0 = Not in Program Suspend mode  
Erase Suspend (ES) SR2[1]: The Erase Suspend bit is used to determine when the device is in Erase Suspend  
mode. This is a status bit that cannot be written. When Erase Suspend bit is set to ‘1, the device is in erase  
suspend mode. When Erase Suspend bit is cleared to ‘0, the device is not in erase suspend mode. Refer to Erase  
Suspend and Resume Commands (75h) (7Ah) for details about the Erase Suspend/Resume commands.  
Program Suspend (PS) SR2[0]: The Program Suspend bit is used to determine when the device is in Program  
Suspend mode. This is a status bit that cannot be written. When Program Suspend bit is set to ‘1, the device is in  
program suspend mode. When the Program Suspend bit is cleared to ‘0, the device is not in program suspend  
mode. Refer to “Program Suspend (PGSP 85h) and Resume (PGRS 8Ah)” on page 92 for details.  
8.6.4  
AutoBoot Register  
Related Commands: AutoBoot Read (ABRD 14h) and AutoBoot Write (ABWR 15h).  
The AutoBoot Register provides a means to automatically read boot code as part of the power on reset, hardware  
reset, or software reset process.  
Table 22  
AutoBoot Register  
Default  
state  
Bits Fieldname  
Function  
Type  
Description  
AutoBoot Start  
Address  
512 byte boundary address for the start of  
boot code access  
31 to 9  
8 to 1  
0
ABSA  
ABSD  
ABE  
Nonvolatile  
000000h  
Number of initial delay cycles between CS#  
going LOW and the first bit of boot code being  
transferred  
AutoBoot Start Delay Nonvolatile  
AutoBoot Enable Nonvolatile  
00h  
0
1 = AutoBoot is enabled  
0 = AutoBoot is not enabled  
Datasheet  
47  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6.5  
Bank Address Register  
Related Commands: Bank Register Access (BRAC B9h), Write Register (WRR 01h), Bank Register Read (BRRD 16h)  
and Bank Register Write (BRWR 17h).  
The Bank Address register supplies additional high order bits of the main flash array byte boundary address for  
legacy commands that supply only the low order 24 bits of address. The Bank Address is used as the high bits of  
address (above A23) for all 3-byte address commands when EXTADD = 0. The Bank Address is not used when  
EXTADD = 1 and traditional 3-byte address commands are instead required to provide all four bytes of address.  
Table 23  
Bank Address Register (BAR)  
Bits Fieldname  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
1 = 4-byte (32-bits) addressing required from  
command.  
Extended Address  
Enable  
7
EXTADD  
Volatile  
0b  
0 = 3-byte (24-bits) addressing from command  
+ Bank Address  
6 to 2  
RFU  
BA25  
RFU  
Reserved  
Volatile  
Volatile  
Volatile  
00000b  
Reserved for Future Use  
A25 for 1 Gb device  
1
0
Bank Address  
Bank Address  
0
0
RFU for lower density device  
Extended Address (EXTADD) BAR[7]: EXTADD controls the address field size for legacy SPI commands. By  
default (power up reset, hardware reset, and software reset), it is cleared to ‘0’ for 3 bytes (24 bits) of address.  
When set to ‘1, the legacy commands will require 4 bytes (32 bits) for the address field. This is a volatile bit.  
Datasheet  
48  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6.6  
ECC Status Register (ECCSR)  
Related Commands: ECC Read (ECCRD 18h). ECCSR does not have user programmable nonvolatile bits. All  
defined bits are volatile read only status. The default state of these bits are set by hardware. See “Automatic  
ECC” on page 89.  
The status of ECC in each ECC unit is provided by the 8-bit ECC Status Register (ECCSR). The ECC Register Read  
command is written followed by an ECC unit address. The contents of the status register then indicates, for the  
selected ECC unit, whether there is an error in the ECC unit eight bit error correction code, the ECC unit of 16 Bytes  
of data, or that ECC is disabled for that ECC unit.  
Table 24  
ECC Status Register (ECCSR)  
Default  
state  
Bits Fieldname  
Function  
Type  
Description  
Reserved for Future Use  
7 to 3  
2
RFU  
Reserved  
0
1 = Single Bit Error found in the ECC unit eight  
bit error correction code  
Volatile, Read  
only  
EECC  
Error in ECC  
0
0 = No error  
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = Single Bit Error corrected in ECC unit data  
0 = No error  
1
0
EECCD  
ECCDI  
Error in ECC unit data  
ECC Disabled  
0
0
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = ECC is disabled in the selected ECC unit  
0 = ECC is enabled in the selected ECC unit  
ECCSR[2] = 1 indicates an error was corrected in the ECC. ECCSR[1] = 1 indicates an error was corrected in the ECC  
unit data. ECCSR[0] = 1 indicates the ECC is disabled. The default state of ‘0’ for all these bits indicates no failures  
and ECC is enabled.  
ECCSR[7:3] are reserved. These have undefined high or low values that can change from one ECC status read to  
another. These bits should be treated as “don’t care” and ignored by any software reading status.  
Datasheet  
49  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6.7  
ASP Register (ASPR)  
Related Commands: ASP Read (ASPRD 2Bh) and ASP Program (ASPP 2Fh).  
The ASP register is a 16-bit OTP memory location used to permanently configure the behavior of Advanced Sector  
Protection (ASP) features.  
Table 25  
ASP Register (ASPR)  
Bits Fieldname  
Function  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Type  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
Default state  
1
Description  
Reserved for Future Use  
15 to 9  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
8
7
6
5
4
3
Note 40  
Note 40  
1
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Note 40  
Note 40  
Note 40  
0 = Password Protection Mode permanently  
enabled  
Password Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
2
PWDMLB  
OTP  
1
1 = Password Protection Mode not  
permanently enabled  
0 = Persistent Protection Mode permanently  
enabled  
Persistent Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
1
0
PSTMLB  
RFU  
OTP  
OTP  
1
1
1 = Persistent Protection Mode not  
permanently enabled  
Reserved  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use (RFU) ASPR[15:3, 0].  
Password Protection Mode Lock Bit (PWDMLB) ASPR[2]: When programmed to ‘0, the Password Protection  
Mode is permanently selected.  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit (PSTMLB) ASPR[1]: When programmed to ‘0, the Persistent Protection  
Mode is permanently selected. PWDMLB and PSTMLB are mutually exclusive, only one may be programmed to ‘0.  
Note  
40.Default value depends on ordering part number, see “Initial delivery state” on page 133.  
Datasheet  
50  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6.8  
Password Register (PASS)  
Related Commands: Password Read (PASSRD E7h) and Password Program (PASSP E8h).  
Table 26  
Bits  
Password Register (PASS)  
Field  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
Nonvolatile OTP storage of 64-bit password.  
The password is no longer readable after the  
password protection mode is selected by  
programming ASP register bit 2 to ‘0.  
Hidden  
63 to 0  
PWD  
OTP  
FFFFFFFF–FFFFFFFFh  
Password  
8.6.9  
PPB Lock Register (PPBL)  
Related Commands: PPB Lock Read (PLBRD A7h, PLBWR A6h)  
Table 27  
Bits  
PPB Lock Register (PPBL)  
Field  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
7 to 1  
RFU  
Reserved  
Volatile  
00h  
Reserved for Future Use  
Persistent Protection  
Mode = 1  
0 = PPB array protected until next power cycle  
or hardware reset  
Protect PPB  
Array  
0
PPBLOCK  
Volatile  
Password Protection  
Mode = 0  
1 = PPB array may be programmed or erased.  
8.6.10  
PPB Access Register (PPBAR)  
Related Commands: PPB Read (PPBRD E2h)  
Table 28 PPB Access Register (PPBAR)  
Default  
state  
Bits Fieldname  
Function  
Type  
Description  
00h = PPB for the sector addressed by the  
PPBRD or PPBP command is programmed to  
‘0, protecting that sector from program or  
erase operations.  
Read or Program per  
sector PPB  
7 to 0  
PPB  
Nonvolatile  
FFh  
FFh = PPB for the sector addressed by the  
PPBRD or PPBP command is erased to ‘1, not  
protecting that sector from program or erase  
operations.  
Datasheet  
51  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
8.6.11  
DYB Access Register (DYBAR)  
Related Commands: DYB Read (DYBRD E0h) and DYB Program (DYBP E1h).  
Table 29 DYB Access Register (DYBAR)  
Bits Fieldname  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
00h = DYB for the sector addressed by the  
DYBRD or DYBP command is cleared to ‘0,  
protecting that sector from program or erase  
operations.  
Read or Write per  
sector DYB  
7 to 0  
DYB  
Volatile  
FFh  
FFh = DYB for the sector addressed by the  
DYBRD or DYBP command is set to ‘1, not  
protecting that sector from program or erase  
operations.  
8.6.12  
SPI DDR Data Learning Registers  
Related Commands: Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h), Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah), Data Learning Pattern Read  
(DLPRD 41h).  
The Data Learning Pattern (DLP) resides in an 8-bit Nonvolatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR) as well as an 8-bit  
Volatile Data Learning Register (VDLR). When shipped from Infineon, the NVDLR value is 00h. Once programmed,  
the NVDLR cannot be reprogrammed or erased; a copy of the data pattern in the NVDLR will also be written to the  
VDLR. The VDLR can be written to at any time, but on reset or power cycles the data pattern will revert back to  
what is in the NVDLR. During the learning phase described in the SPI DDR modes, the DLP will come from the  
VDLR. Each IO will output the same DLP value for every clock edge. For example, if the DLP is 34h (or binary  
00110100) then during the first clock edge all IOs will output ‘0’; subsequently, the 2nd clock edge all I/O’s will  
output ‘0, the 3rd will output ‘1, etc.  
When the VDLR value is 00h, no preamble data pattern is presented during the dummy phase in the DDR  
commands.  
Table 30  
Bits  
Nonvolatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR)  
Field  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
OTP value that may be transferred to the host  
during DDR read command latency (dummy)  
cycles to provide a training pattern to help the  
host more accurately center the data capture  
point in the received data bits.  
Nonvolatile Data  
Learning Pattern  
7 to 0  
NVDLP  
OTP  
00h  
Table 31  
Bits  
Volatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR)  
Field  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
Volatile copy of the NVDLP used to enable and  
deliver the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) to the  
outputs. The VDLP may be changed by the  
host during system operation.  
Takes the value of  
Volatile Data  
7 to 0  
VDLP  
Volatile NVDLR during POR or  
Reset  
Learning Pattern  
Datasheet  
52  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
9
Data protection  
9.1  
Secure silicon region (OTP)  
The device has a 2048-byte one time program (OTP) address space that is separate from the main flash array. The  
OTP area is divided into 32, individually lockable, 64-byte aligned and length regions.  
The OTP memory space is intended for increased system security. OTP values can “mate” a flash component with  
the system CPU/ASIC to prevent device substitution. See “OTP address space” on page 39, “One Time Program  
Array commands” on page 97, and “OTP Read (OTPR 4Bh)” on page 98.  
9.1.1  
Reading OTP memory space  
The OTP Read command uses the same protocol as Fast Read. OTP Read operations outside the valid 2-kB OTP  
address range will yield indeterminate data.  
9.1.2  
Programming OTP memory space  
The protocol of the OTP programming command is the same as Page Program. The OTP Program command can  
be issued multiple times to any given OTP address, but this address space can never be erased. The valid address  
range for OTP Program is depicted in Figure 29. OTP Program operations outside the valid OTP address range  
will be ignored and the WEL in SR1 will remain high (set to ‘1’). OTP Program operations while FREEZE = 1 will fail  
with P_ERR in SR1 set to ‘1.  
9.1.3  
Infineon programmed random number  
Infineon standard practice is to program the low order 16 bytes of the OTP memory space (locations 0x0 to 0xF)  
with a 128-bit random number using the Linear Congruential Random Number method. The seed value for the  
algorithm is a random number concatenated with the day and time of tester insertion.  
9.1.4  
Lock bytes  
The LSB of each Lock byte protects the lowest address region related to the byte, the MSB protects the highest  
address region related to the byte. The next higher address byte similarly protects the next higher 8 regions. The  
LSB bit of the lowest address Lock Byte protects the higher address 16 bytes of the lowest address region. In other  
words, the LSB of location 0x10 protects all the Lock Bytes and RFU bytes in the lowest address region from  
further programming. See “OTP address space” on page 39.  
9.2  
Write Enable command  
The Write Enable (WREN) command must be written prior to any command that modifies nonvolatile data. The  
WREN command sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit. The WEL bit is cleared to ‘0’ (disables writes) during  
power-up, hardware reset, or after the device completes the following commands:  
• Reset  
• Page Program (PP)  
• Sector Erase (SE)  
• Bulk Erase (BE)  
• Write Disable (WRDI)  
• Write Registers (WRR)  
• Quad-input Page Programming (QPP)  
• OTP Byte Programming (OTPP)  
Datasheet  
53  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
9.3  
Block protection  
The Block Protect bits (Status Register bits BP2, BP1, BP0) in combination with the Configuration Register  
TBPROT bit can be used to protect an address range of the main flash array from program and erase operations.  
The size of the range is determined by the value of the BP bits and the upper or lower starting point of the range  
is selected by the TBPROT bit of the Configuration Register.  
Table 32  
BP2  
Upper array start of protection (TBPROT = 0)  
Status register content  
Protected memory (kbytes)  
Protected fraction of memory array  
S79FL01GS  
1024 Mb  
BP1  
BP0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
None  
0
Upper 64th  
Upper 32nd  
Upper 16th  
Upper 8th  
Upper 4th  
Upper Half  
All Sectors  
2048  
4096  
8192  
16384  
32768  
65536  
131072  
Table 33  
BP2  
Lower array start of protection (TBPROT = 1)  
Status register content  
Protected memory (kbytes)  
Protected fraction of memory array  
S79FL01GS  
1024 Mb  
BP1  
BP0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
None  
0
Lower 64th  
Lower 32nd  
Lower 16th  
Lower 8th  
Lower 4th  
Lower Half  
All Sectors  
2048  
4096  
8192  
16384  
32768  
65536  
131072  
When Block Protection is enabled (i.e., any BP2–0 are set to ‘1’), advanced sector protection (ASP) can still be  
used to protect sectors not protected by the block protection scheme. In the case that both ASP and block  
protection are used on the same sector the logical OR of ASP and Block Protection related to the sector is used.  
Recommendation: ASP and block protection should not be used concurrently. Use one or the other, but not both.  
9.3.1  
Freeze bit  
Bit 0 of the Configuration Register is the FREEZE bit. The FREEZE bit locks the BP2–0 bits in Status Register-1 and  
the TBPROT bit in the Configuration Register to their value at the time the FREEZE bit is set to ‘1. Once the FREEZE  
bit has been written to a logic 1 it cannot be cleared to a logic 0 until a power-on-reset is executed. As long as the  
FREEZE bit is cleared to logic 0 the status register BP bits and the TBPROT bit of the Configuration Register are  
writable. The FREEZE bit also protects the entire OTP memory space from programming when set to ‘1. Any  
attempt to change the BP bits with the WRR command while FREEZE = 1 is ignored and no error status is set.  
Datasheet  
54  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
9.4  
Advanced sector protection  
Advanced sector protection (ASP) is the name used for a set of independent hardware and software methods  
used to disable or enable programming or erase operations, individually, in any or all sectors. An overview of  
these methods is shown in Figure 30.  
Block Protection and ASP protection settings for each sector are logically OR’d to define the protection for each  
sector, i.e. if either mechanism is protecting a sector the sector cannot be programmed or erased. Refer to “Block  
protection” on page 54 for full details of the BP2–0 bits.  
ASP Register  
One Time Programmable  
Password Method Persistent Method  
(ASPR[2]=0)  
(ASPR[1]=0)  
6.) Password Method requires a  
password to set PPB Lock to ‘1’  
to enable program or erase of  
PPB bits  
7.) Persistent Method only allows  
PPB Lock to be cleared to ‘0’ to  
prevent program or erase of PPB  
bits. Power off or hardware reset  
required to set PPB Lock to ‘1’  
64-bit Password  
(One Time Protect)  
4.) PPB Lock bit is volatile and  
defaults to ‘1’ (persistent  
mode), or ‘0’ (password mode)  
upon reset  
PBB Lock Bit  
‘0’ = PPBs locked  
‘1’ =PPBs unlocked  
5.) PPB Lock = ‘0’ locks all PPBs  
to their current state  
Persistent  
Protection Bit  
(PPB)  
Dynamic  
Protection Bit  
(DYB)  
Memory Array  
Sector 0  
Sector 1  
Sector 2  
PPB 0  
DYB 0  
DYB 1  
DYB 2  
PPB 1  
1
PPB 2  
Sector N-2  
Sector N-1  
Sector N  
PPB N-2  
PPB N-1  
PPB N  
DYB N-2  
DYB N-1  
DYB N  
3.) DYB are volatile bits  
1.) N = Highest Address Sector  
a sector is protected if its PPB =’0’  
or its DYB = ‘0’  
PPB are programmed individually  
but erased as a group  
2.)  
Figure 30  
Advanced sector protection overview  
Every main flash array sector has a nonvolatile (PPB) and a volatile (DYB) protection bit associated with it. When  
either bit is ‘0, the sector is protected from program and erase operations.  
The PPB bits are protected from program and erase when the PPB Lock bit is ‘0. There are two methods for  
managing the state of the PPB Lock bit, Persistent Protection and Password Protection.  
The Persistent Protection method sets the PPB Lock bit to ‘1’ during POR, or Hardware Reset so that the PPB bits  
are unprotected by a device reset. There is a command to clear the PPB Lock bit to ‘0’ to protect the PPB. There  
is no command in the Persistent Protection method to set the PPB Lock bit to ‘1, therefore the PPB Lock bit will  
remain at ‘0’ until the next power-off or hardware reset. The Persistent Protection method allows boot code the  
option of changing sector protection by programming or erasing the PPB, then protecting the PPB from further  
change for the remainder of normal system operation by clearing the PPB Lock bit to ‘0. This is sometimes called  
Boot-code controlled sector protection.  
The Password method clears the PPB Lock bit to ‘0’ during POR, or Hardware Reset to protect the PPB. A 64-bit  
password may be permanently programmed and hidden for the password method. A command can be used to  
provide a password for comparison with the hidden password. If the password matches, the PPB Lock bit is set  
to ‘1’ to unprotect the PPB. A command can be used to clear the PPB Lock bit to ‘0. This method requires use of  
a password to control PPB protection.  
The selection of the PPB Lock bit management method is made by programming OTP bits in the ASP Register so  
as to permanently select the method used.  
Datasheet  
55  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
9.4.1  
ASP register  
The ASP register is used to permanently configure the behavior of Advanced Sector Protection (ASP) features.  
See Table 25.  
As shipped from the factory, all devices default ASP to the Persistent Protection mode, with all sectors  
unprotected, when power is applied. The device programmer or host system must then choose which sector  
protection method to use. Programming either of the, one-time programmable, Protection Mode Lock Bits, locks  
the part permanently in the selected mode:  
• ASPR[2:1] = 11 = No ASP mode selected, Persistent Protection Mode is the default.  
• ASPR[2:1] = 10 = Persistent Protection Mode permanently selected.  
• ASPR[2:1] = 01 = Password Protection Mode permanently selected.  
• ASPR[2:1] = 00 = Illegal condition, attempting to program both bits to zero results in a programming failure.  
ASP register programming rules:  
• If the password mode is chosen, the password must be programmed prior to setting the Protection Mode Lock  
Bits.  
• Once the Protection Mode is selected, the Protection Mode Lock Bits are permanently protected from  
programming and no further changes to the ASP register is allowed.  
The programming time of the ASP Register is the same as the typical page programming time. The system can  
determine the status of the ASP register programming operation by reading the WIP bit in the Status Register.  
See “Status Register 1 (SR1)” on page 42 for information on WIP.  
After selecting a sector protection method, each sector can operate in each of the following states:  
• Dynamically Locked — A sector is protected and can be changed by a simple command.  
• Persistently Locked — A sector is protected and cannot be changed if its PPB Bit is ‘0.  
• Unlocked — The sector is unprotected and can be changed by a simple command.  
9.4.2  
Persistent protection bits  
The persistent protection bits (PPB) are located in a separate nonvolatile flash array. One of the PPB bits is related  
to each sector. When a PPB is ‘0, its related sector is protected from program and erase operations. The PPB are  
programmed individually but must be erased as a group, similar to the way individual words may be programmed  
in the main array but an entire sector must be erased at the same time. The PPB have the same program and erase  
endurance as the main flash memory array. Preprogramming and verification prior to erasure are handled by the  
device.  
Programming a PPB bit requires the typical page programming time. Erasing all the PPBs requires typical sector  
erase time. During PPB bit programming and PPB bit erasing, status is available by reading the Status register.  
Reading of a PPB bit requires the initial access time of the device.  
9.4.3  
Dynamic protection bits  
Dynamic protection bits are volatile and unique for each sector and can be individually modified. DYB only  
control the protection for sectors that have their PPB set to ‘1. By issuing the DYB Write command, a DYB is  
cleared to ‘0’ or set to ‘1, thus placing each sector in the protected or unprotected state respectively. This feature  
allows software to easily protect sectors against inadvertent changes, yet does not prevent the easy removal of  
protection when changes are needed. The DYBs can be set or cleared as often as needed as they are volatile bits.  
Notes  
41.Each PPB is individually programmed to ‘0’ and all are erased to ‘1’ in parallel.  
42.If the PPB Lock bit is ‘0, the PPB Program or PPB Erase command does not execute and fails without  
programming or erasing the PPB.  
43.The state of the PPB for a given sector can be verified by using the PPB Read command.  
Datasheet  
56  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
9.4.4  
PPB Lock Bit (PPBL[0])  
The PPB Lock Bit is a volatile bit for protecting all PPB bits. When cleared to ‘0, it locks all PPBs and when set to  
‘1, it allows the PPBs to be changed.  
The PLBWR command is used to clear the PPB Lock bit to ‘0. The PPB Lock Bit must be cleared to ‘0’ only after  
all the PPBs are configured to the desired settings.  
In Persistent Protection mode, the PPB Lock is set to ‘1’ during POR or a hardware reset. When cleared to ‘0, no  
software command sequence can set the PPB Lock bit to ‘1, only another hardware reset or power-up can set  
the PPB Lock bit.  
In the Password Protection mode, the PPB Lock bit is cleared to ‘0’ during POR or a hardware reset. The PPB Lock  
bit can only be set to ‘1’ by the Password Unlock command.  
9.4.5  
Sector protection states summary  
Each sector can be in one of the following protection states:  
• Unlocked — The sector is unprotected and protection can be changed by a simple command. The protection  
state defaults to unprotected after a power cycle, software reset, or hardware reset.  
• Dynamically Locked — A sector is protected and protection can be changed by a simple command. The  
protection state is not saved across a power cycle or reset.  
• Persistently Locked — A sector is protected and protection can only be changed if the PPB Lock Bit is set to ‘1.  
The protection state is nonvolatile and saved across a power cycle or reset. Changing the protection state  
requires programming and or erase of the PPB bits.  
Table 34  
Sector protection states  
Protection bit values  
Sector state  
PPB lock  
PPB  
1
DYB  
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Unprotected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
1
0
0
1
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
0
0
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
1
1
Unprotected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
1
0
0
1
0
0
9.4.6  
Persistent Protection mode  
The Persistent Protection method sets the PPB Lock bit to ‘1’ during POR or Hardware Reset so that the PPB bits  
are unprotected by a device hardware reset. Software reset does not affect the PPB Lock bit. The PLBWR  
command can clear the PPB Lock bit to ‘0’ to protect the PPB. There is no command to set the PPB Lock bit  
therefore the PPB Lock bit will remain at ‘0’ until the next power-off or hardware reset.  
Datasheet  
57  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
9.4.7  
Password Protection mode  
Password Protection mode allows an even higher level of security than the Persistent Sector Protection mode,  
by requiring a 64-bit password for unlocking the PPB Lock bit. In addition to this password requirement, after  
power up and hardware reset, the PPB Lock bit is cleared to ‘0’ to ensure protection at power-up. Successful  
execution of the Password Unlock command by entering the entire password clears the PPB Lock bit, allowing  
for sector PPB modifications.  
Password protection notes:  
• Once the Password is programmed and verified, the Password Mode (ASPR[2] = 0) must be set in order to prevent  
reading the password.  
• The Password Program Command is only capable of programming ‘0’s. Programming ‘1’ after a cell is  
programmed as ‘0’ results in the cell left as ‘0’ with no programming error set.  
• The password is all 1’s when shipped from Infineon. It is located in its own memory space and is accessible  
through the use of the Password Program and Password Read commands.  
• All 64-bit password combinations are valid as a password.  
• The Password mode, once programmed, prevents reading the 64-bit password and further password  
programming. All further program and read commands to the password region are disabled and these  
commands are ignored. There is no means to verify what the password is after the Password Mode Lock Bit is  
selected. Password verification is only allowed before selecting the Password Protection mode.  
• The Protection Mode Lock Bits are not erasable.  
• The exact password must be entered in order for the unlocking function to occur. If the password unlock  
command provided password does not match the hidden internal password, the unlock operation fails in the  
same manner as a programming operation on a protected sector. The P_ERR bit is set to one and the WIP Bit  
remains set. In this case it is a failure to change the state of the PPB Lock bit because it is still protected by the  
lack of a valid password.  
• The Password Unlock command cannot be accepted any faster than once every 100 µs ± 20 µs. This makes it  
take an unreasonably long time (58 million years) for a hacker to run through all the 64-bit combinations in an  
attempt to correctly match a password. The Read Status Register 1 command may be used to read the WIP bit  
to determine when the device has completed the password unlock command or is ready to accept a new  
password command. When a valid password is provided the password unlock command does not insert the  
100 µs delay before returning the WIP bit to ‘0.  
• If the password is lost after selecting the Password mode, there is no way to set the PPB Lock bit.  
Datasheet  
58  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10  
Commands  
All communication between the host system and the S79FL01GS memory device is in the form of units called  
commands.  
All commands begin with an instruction that selects the type of information transfer or device operation to be  
performed. Commands may also have an address, instruction modifier, latency period, data transfer to the  
memory, or data transfer from the memory. All instruction, address, and data information is transferred serially  
between the host system and memory device.  
All instructions are transferred from host to memory as a single bit serial sequence on the SI signal.  
Single bit wide commands may provide an address or data sent only on the SI signal. Data may be sent back to  
the host serially on SO signal.  
Quad Output commands provide an address sent to the memory only on the IO0 and IO4 signal. Data will be  
returned to the host as a sequence of 8-bit (byte) groups on IO0–IO7.  
Quad Input/Output (I/O) commands provide an address sent from the host as four-bit (nibble) groups on Quad  
SPI-1 IO0–IO3 and Quad SPI-2 IO4–IO7. Data is returned to the host similarly as 8-bit (byte) groups on IO0–IO7.  
Commands are structured as follows:  
• Each command begins with an eight bit (byte) instruction.  
• The instruction may be stand alone or may be followed by address bits to select a location within one of several  
address spaces in the device. The address may be either a 24-bit or 32-bit byte boundary address.  
• The S79FL01GS Serial Peripheral Interface with multiple IO provides the option for each transfer of address and  
data information to be done one, or four bits in parallel. This enables a trade off between the number of signal  
connections (IO bus width) and the speed of information transfer. If the host system can support a four-bit wide  
IO bus the memory performance can be increased by using the instructions that provide parallel four-bit (quad)  
transfers.  
• The width of all transfers following the instruction are determined by the instruction sent.  
• All single bits or parallel bit groups are transferred in most to least significant bit order.  
• Some instructions send instruction modifier (mode) bits following the address to indicate that the next  
command will be of the same type with an implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command thus  
does not provide an instruction byte, only a new address and mode bits. This reduces the time needed to send  
each command when the same command type is repeated in a sequence of commands.  
• The address or mode bits may be followed by write data to be stored in the memory device or by a read latency  
period before read data is returned to the host.  
• Read latency may be zero to several SCK cycles (also referred to as dummy cycles).  
• All instruction, address, mode, and data information is transferred in byte granularity. Addresses are shifted  
into the device with the most significant byte first. All data is transferred with the lowest address byte sent first.  
Following bytes of data are sent in lowest to highest byte address order i.e. the byte address increments.  
• All attempts to read the flash memory array during a program, erase, or a write cycle (embedded operations)  
are ignored. The embedded operation will continue to execute without any affect. A very limited set of  
commands are accepted during an embedded operation. These are discussed in the individual command  
descriptions. While a program, erase, or write operation is in progress, it is recommended to check that the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘0’ before issuing most commands to the device, to ensure the new command can  
be accepted.  
• Depending on the command, the time for execution varies. A command to read status information from an  
executing command is available to determine when the command completes execution and whether the  
command was successful.  
Datasheet  
59  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
• Although host software in some cases is used to directly control the SPI interface signals, the hardware interfaces  
of the host system and the memory device generally handle the details of signal relationships and timing. For  
this reason, signal relationships and timing are not covered in detail within this software interface focused  
section of the document. Instead, the focus is on the logical sequence of bits transferred in each command  
rather than the signal timing and relationships. Following are some general signal relationship descriptions to  
keep in mind. For additional information on the bit level format and signal timing relationships of commands,  
see “Command protocol” on page 13.  
- The host always controls the Chip Select (CS#), Serial Clock (SCK), and Serial Input (IO0 and IO4) for single-bit  
wide transfers. The memory drives the IO0–IO7 signals during transfers.  
- All commands begin with the host selecting the memory by driving CS# LOW before the first rising edge of  
SCK. CS# is kept LOW throughout a command and when CS# is returned HIGH the command ends. Generally,  
CS# remains LOW for eight bit transfer multiples to transfer byte granularity information. Some commands  
will not be accepted if CS# is returned HIGH not at an 8-bit boundary.  
10.1  
Command set summary  
The S79FL01GS Dual-Quad SPI device contains two Quad SPI devices (Quad SPI-1 and Quad SPI-2)) stacked in a  
Dual Die Package (DDP). Both devices are selected to decode each command instruction and address when the  
CS# signal, shared by both devices, goes low. Quad SPI-1 device responds to commands, address, data in and  
data out on IO0–IO3. Quad SPI-2 device responds to commands, address, data in and data out on IO4–IO7. All  
commands are executed by both devices in parallel.  
Both Quad SPI devices must be configured, by writing to the various status and configuration registers in parallel,  
to define the same overall sector map and behavior of both devices, selected by each CS# for the DDP.  
10.1.1  
Extended addressing  
To accommodate addressing above 256 Mb, there are three options:  
1. New instructions are provided with 4-byte address, used to access up to 32 Gb of memory.  
Table 35  
Instructions and corresponding details  
Instruction name  
Description  
Code (Hex)  
4FAST_READ  
4READ  
4QOR  
Read Fast (4-byte Address)  
0C  
13  
6C  
EC  
EE  
12  
34  
DC  
Read (4-byte Address)  
Read Quad Out (4-byte Address)  
Quad I/O Read (4-byte Address)  
DDR Quad I/O Read (4-byte Address)  
Page Program (4-byte Address)  
Quad Page Program (4-byte Address)  
Erase 512 kB (4-byte Address)  
4QIOR  
4DDRQIOR  
4PP  
4QPP  
4SE  
Datasheet  
60  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
2. For backward compatibility to the 3-byte address instructions, the standard instructions can be used in  
conjunction with the EXTADD Bit in the Bank Address Register (BAR[7]). By default BAR[7] is cleared to ‘0’  
(following power up and hardware reset), to enable 3-byte (24-bit) addressing. When set to ‘1, the legacy  
commands are changed to require 4 bytes (32 bits) for the address field. The following instructions can be used  
in conjunction with EXTADD bit to switch from 3 bytes to 4 bytes of address field.  
Table 36  
Instructions and corresponding details  
Instruction name  
Description  
Code (Hex)  
READ  
FAST_READ  
QOR  
Read (3-byte Address)  
Read Fast (3-byte Address)  
03  
0B  
6B  
EB  
ED  
02  
32  
D8  
Read Quad Out (3-byte Address)  
Quad I/O Read (3-byte Address)  
DDR Quad I/O Read (3-byte Address)  
Page Program (3-byte Address)  
Quad Page Program (3-byte Address)  
Erase 512 kB (3-byte Address)  
QIOR  
DDRQIOR  
PP  
QPP  
SE  
3. For backward compatibility to the 3-byte addressing, the standard instructions can be used in conjunction  
with the Bank Address Register:  
a. The Bank Address Register is used to switch between 128-Mbit (16-Mbyte) banks of memory, The standard  
3-byte address selects an address within the bank selected by the Bank Address Register.  
i. The host system writes the Bank Address Register to access beyond the first 128 Mbits of memory.  
ii. This applies to read, erase, and program commands.  
b. The Bank Register provides the high order (4th) byte of address, which is used to address the available  
memory at addresses greater than 16 Mbytes.  
c. Bank Register bits are volatile.  
i. On power up, the default is Bank 0 (the lowest address 16 Mbytes).  
d. For Read, the device will continuously transfer out data until the end of the array.  
i. There is no bank to bank delay.  
ii. The Bank Address Register is not updated.  
iii.The Bank Address Register value is used only for the initial address of an access.  
Table 37  
Bank address map  
Bank address register bits  
Bank  
Memory array address range (Hex)  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
00000000  
01000000  
02000000  
03000000  
00FFFFFF  
01FFFFFF  
02FFFFFF  
03FFFFFF  
Datasheet  
61  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Table 38  
S79FL01GS command set (sorted by function)  
Maximum  
frequency  
(MHz)  
Command  
Instruction  
value (Hex)  
Function  
Command description  
name  
READ_ID  
Read Electronic Manufacturer Signature  
(REMS)  
90  
9F  
133  
133  
Read ID (JEDEC Manufacturer ID and JEDEC  
RDID  
Read Device  
CFI)  
Identification  
RES  
Read Electronic Signature  
Read Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters  
Read Status Register 1  
Read Status Register 2  
Read Configuration Register 1  
Write Register (Status 1, Configuration 1)  
Write Disable  
AB  
5A  
05  
07  
35  
01  
04  
06  
50  
RSFDP  
RDSR1  
RDSR2  
RDCR  
WRR  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
WRDI  
WREN  
Write Enable  
Clear Status Register 1 – Erase/Program Fail  
Reset  
CLSR  
30  
133  
133  
(QUAD = 0)  
104  
ABRD  
AutoBoot Register Read  
14  
Register Access  
(QUAD = 1)  
ABWR  
BRRD  
BRWR  
AutoBoot Register Write  
Bank Register Read  
Bank Register Write  
15  
16  
17  
133  
133  
133  
Bank Register Access  
BRAC  
(Legacy Command formerly used for Deep  
Power Down)  
B9  
133  
DLPRD  
PNVDLR  
WVDLR  
READ  
Data Learning Pattern Read  
Program NV Data Learning Register  
Write Volatile Data Learning Register  
Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
Read (4-byte address)  
41  
43  
4A  
03  
13  
0B  
0C  
6B  
6C  
EB  
EC  
ED  
EE  
133  
133  
133  
50  
4READ  
50  
FAST_READ Fast Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
4FAST_READ Fast Read (4-byte address)  
133  
133  
104  
104  
104  
104  
80  
QOR  
4QOR  
Read Quad Out (3- or 4-byte address)  
Read Quad Out (4-byte address)  
Read Flash Array  
QIOR  
Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
Quad I/O Read (4-byte address)  
4QIOR  
DDRQIOR  
DDR Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
4DDRQIOR DDR Quad I/O Read (4-byte address)  
80  
Datasheet  
62  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Table 38  
S79FL01GS command set (sorted by function) (Continued)  
Maximum  
frequency  
(MHz)  
Command  
Instruction  
value (Hex)  
Function  
Command description  
name  
PP  
Page Program (3- or 4-byte address)  
Page Program (4-byte address)  
02  
12  
32  
133  
133  
80  
4PP  
QPP  
Quad Page Program (3- or 4-byte address)  
Quad Page Program - Alternate instruction  
(3- or 4-byte address)  
Program Flash Array  
QPP  
38  
80  
4QPP  
PGSP  
PGRS  
BE  
Quad Page Program (4-byte address)  
Program Suspend  
Program Resume  
Bulk Erase  
34  
85  
8A  
60  
C7  
D8  
DC  
75  
7A  
42  
4B  
E0  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
2B  
2F  
A7  
A6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
F0  
FF  
80  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
BE  
Bulk Erase (alternate command)  
Erase 512 kB (3- or 4-byte address)  
Erase 512 kB (4-byte address)  
Erase Suspend  
SE  
Erase Flash Array  
4SE  
ERSP  
ERRS  
OTPP  
OTPR  
DYBRD  
DYBWR  
PPBRD  
PPBP  
PPBE  
ASPRD  
ASPP  
PLBRD  
PLBWR  
PASSRD  
PASSP  
PASSU  
RESET  
MBR  
Erase Resume  
OTP Program  
One Time Program  
Array  
OTP Read  
DYB Read  
DYB Write  
PPB Read  
PPB Program  
PPB Erase  
ASP Read  
Advanced Sector  
Protection  
ASP Program  
PPB Lock Bit Read  
PPB Lock Bit Write  
Password Read  
Password Program  
Password Unlock  
Software Reset  
Reset  
Mode Bit Reset  
Reserved for Future  
Use  
Reserved for Multi-I/O-High Performance  
Mode (MPM)  
MPM  
A3  
133  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
Reserved-18 Reserved  
Reserved-E5 Reserved  
Reserved-E6 Reserved  
18  
E5  
E6  
Datasheet  
63  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.1.2  
Read Device identification  
There are multiple commands to read information about the device manufacturer, device type, and device  
features. SPI memories from different vendors have used different commands and formats for reading  
information about the memories. The S79FL01GS device supports the three most common device information  
commands.  
10.1.3  
Register read or write  
There are multiple registers for reporting embedded operation status or controlling device configuration  
options. There are commands for reading or writing these registers. Registers contain both volatile and  
nonvolatile bits. Nonvolatile bits in registers are automatically erased and programmed as a single (write)  
operation.  
10.1.3.1  
Monitoring operation status  
The host system can determine when a write, program, erase, suspend or other embedded operation is complete  
by monitoring the Write in Progress (WIP) bit in the Status Register. The Read from Status Register 1 command  
provides the state of the WIP bit. The program error (P_ERR) and erase error (E_ERR) bits in the status register  
indicate whether the most recent program or erase command has not completed successfully. When P_ERR or  
E_ERR bits are set to one, the WIP bit will remain set to one indicating the device remains busy. Under this  
condition, only the CLSR, WRDI, RDSR1, RDSR2, and software RESET commands are valid commands. A Clear  
Status Register (CLSR) followed by a Write Disable (WRDI) command must be sent to return the device to standby  
state. CLSR clears the WIP, P_ERR, and E_ERR bits. WRDI clears the WEL bit. Alternatively, Hardware Reset, or  
Software Reset (RESET) may be used to return the device to standby state.  
10.1.3.2  
Configuration  
There are commands to read, write, and protect registers that control interface path width, interface timing,  
interface address length, and some aspects of data protection.  
10.1.4  
Read flash array  
Data may be read from the memory starting at any byte boundary. Data bytes are sequentially read from  
incrementally higher byte addresses until the host ends the data transfer by driving CS# input HIGH. If the byte  
address reaches the maximum address of the memory array, the read will continue at address zero of the array.  
There are several different read commands to specify different access latency and data path widths. Double Data  
Rate (DDR) commands also define the address and data bit relationship to both SCK edges:  
• The Read command provides a single address bit per SCK rising edge on the IO0 and IO4 signal with read data  
returning a single bit per SCK falling edge on the IO1 and IO5 signal. This command has zero latency between  
the address and the returning data but is limited to a maximum SCK rate of 50 MHz.  
• Other read commands have a latency period between the address and returning data but can operate at higher  
SCK frequencies. The latency depends on the Configuration Register latency code.  
• The Fast Read command provides a single address bit per SCK rising edge on the IO0 and IO4 signal with read  
data returning a single bit per SCK falling edge on the IO1 and IO5 signal and may operate up to 133 MHz.  
• Quad Output read commands provide address a single bit per SCK rising edge on the IO0 and IO4 signal with  
read data returning four bits of data per SCK falling edge on the IO0–IO7 signals.  
• Quad I/O Read commands provide address four bits per SCK rising edge with read data returning four bits of  
data per SCK falling edge on the IO0–IO7 signals.  
• Quad Double Data Rate read commands provide address four bits per every SCK edge with read data returning  
eight bits of data per every SCK edge on the IO0–IO7 signals. Double Data Rate (DDR) operation is only supported  
for core and I/O voltages of 3 V to 3.6 V.  
Datasheet  
64  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.1.5  
Program flash array  
Programming data requires two commands: Write Enable (WREN), and Page Program (PP or QPP). The Page  
Program command accepts from 1 byte up to 512 consecutive bytes of data (page) to be programmed in one  
operation. Programming means that bits can either be left at ‘1, or programmed from ‘1’ to ‘0. Changing bits  
from ‘0’ to ‘1’ requires an erase operation.  
10.1.6  
Erase flash array  
The Sector Erase (SE) and Bulk Erase (BE) commands set all the bits in a sector or the entire memory array to ‘1.  
A bit needs to be first erased to ‘1’ before programming can change it to ‘0. While bits can be individually  
programmed from ‘1’ to ‘0, erasing bits from ‘0’ to ‘1’ must be done on a sector-wide (SE) or array-wide (BE) level.  
10.1.7  
OTP, block protection, and advanced sector protection  
There are commands to read and program a separate one time programmable (OTP) array for permanent data  
such as a serial number. There are commands to control a contiguous group (block) of flash memory array sectors  
that are protected from program and erase operations. There are commands to control which individual flash  
memory array sectors are protected from program and erase operations.  
10.1.8  
Reset  
There is a command to reset to the default conditions present after power on to the device. There is a command  
to reset (exit from) the Enhanced Performance Read modes.  
10.1.9  
Reserved  
Some instructions are reserved for future use. In this generation of the S79FL01GS some of these command  
instructions may be unused and not affect device operation, some may have undefined results.  
Some commands are reserved to ensure that a legacy or alternate source device command is allowed without  
affect. This allows legacy software to issue some commands that are not relevant for the current generation  
S79FL01GS device with the assurance these commands do not cause some unexpected action.  
Some commands are reserved for use in special versions of the FL-S not addressed by this document or for a  
future generation. This allows new host memory controller designs to plan the flexibility to issue these command  
instructions. The command format is defined if known at the time this document revision is published.  
Datasheet  
65  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.2  
Identification commands  
10.2.1  
Read Identification — REMS (Read_ID or REMS 90h)  
The READ_ID command identifies the Device Manufacturer ID and the Device ID. The command is also referred to  
as Read Electronic Manufacturer and device Signature (REMS). READ-ID (REMS) is only supported for backward  
compatibility and should not be used for new software designs. New software designs should instead make use  
of the RDID command.  
The command is initiated by shifting on SI the instruction code “90h” followed by a 24-bit address of 00000h.  
Following this, the Manufacturer ID and the Device ID are shifted out on SO starting at the falling edge of SCK after  
address. The Manufacturer ID and the Device ID are always shifted out with the MSB first. If the 24-bit address is  
set to 000001h, then the Device ID is read out first followed by the Manufacturer ID. The Manufacturer ID and  
Device ID output data toggles between address 000000H and 000001H until terminated by a low to high transition  
on CS# input. The maximum clock frequency for the READ_ID command is 133 MHz.  
For the Dual-Quad SPI device the Read Identification (REMS) instruction and data read is only done on Quad SPI-1  
using IO0 and IO1.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Manufacture ID  
Device ID  
Figure 31  
Table 39  
READ_ID (90h) command sequence  
Read_ID values  
Device  
Manufacturer ID (Hex)  
Device ID (Hex)  
S79FL01GS  
01  
21  
Datasheet  
66  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.2.2  
Read Identification (RDID 9Fh)  
The Read Identification (RDID) command provides read access to manufacturer identification, device  
identification, and common flash interface (CFI) information. The manufacturer identification is assigned by  
JEDEC. The CFI structure is defined by JEDEC standard. The device identification and CFI values are assigned by  
Infineon.  
The JEDEC common flash interface (CFI) specification defines a device information structure, which allows a  
vendor-specified software flash management program (driver) to be used for entire families of flash devices.  
Software support can then be device-independent, JEDEC manufacturer ID independent, forward and  
backward-compatible for the specified flash device families. System vendors can standardize their flash drivers  
for long-term software compatibility by using the CFI values to configure a family driver from the CFI information  
of the device in use.  
Any RDID command issued while a program, erase, or write cycle is in progress is ignored and has no effect on  
execution of the program, erase, or write cycle that is in progress.  
The RDID instruction is shifted on SI. After the last bit of the RDID instruction is shifted into the device, a byte of  
manufacturer identification, two bytes of device identification, extended device identification, and CFI  
information will be shifted sequentially out on SO. As a whole this information is referred to as ID-CFI. See “ID-CFI  
address space” on page 38 for the detail description of the ID-CFI contents.  
Continued shifting of output beyond the end of the defined ID-CFI address space will provide undefined data. The  
RDID command sequence is terminated by driving CS# to the logic HIGH state anytime during data output.  
For the S79FL01GS Dual-Quad SPI device, the Read Identification (RDID) instruction and data read is only done  
on Quad SPI-1 using IO0 and IO1. The maximum clock frequency for the RDID command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Data 1  
Data N  
Figure 32  
Read Identification (RDID 9Fh) command sequence  
Datasheet  
67  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.2.3  
Read Electronic Signature (RES) (ABh)  
The RES command is used to read a single byte Electronic Signature from SO. RES is only supported for backward  
compatibility and should not be used for new software designs. New software designs should instead make use  
of the RDID command.  
The RES instruction is shifted in followed by three dummy bytes onto SI. After the last bit of the three dummy  
bytes are shifted into the device, a byte of Electronic Signature will be shifted out of SO. Each bit is shifted out by  
the falling edge of SCK. The maximum clock frequency for the RES command is 50 MHz.  
The Electronic Signature can be read repeatedly by applying multiples of eight clock cycles.  
The RES command sequence is terminated by driving CS# to the logic HIGH state anytime during data output.  
For the S79FL01GS Dual-Quad SPI device, the Read Electronic Signature (RES) instruction and data read is only  
done on Quad SPI-1 using IO0 and IO1.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23  
Instruction (ABh)  
1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Device ID  
Phase  
Dummy  
Figure 33  
Table 40  
Read Electronic Signature (RES ABh) command sequence  
RES values  
Device  
Device ID (Hex)  
S79FL01GS  
21  
10.2.4  
Read serial flash discoverable parameters (RSFDP 5Ah)  
The command is initiated by shifting on SI the instruction code ‘5Ah, followed by a 24-bit address of 000000h,  
followed by eight dummy cycles. The SFDP bytes are then shifted out on SO starting at the falling edge of SCK  
after the eight dummy cycles. The SFDP bytes are always shifted out with the MSB first. If the 24-bit address is set  
to any other value, the selected location in the SFDP space is the starting point of the data read. This enables  
random access to any parameter in the SFDP space. The maximum clock frequency for the RSFDP command is  
133 MHz.  
For the S79FL01GS Dual-Quad device the Read Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters (RSFDP) instruction and  
data read is only done on Quad SPI-1 using IO0 and IO1.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23  
1 0  
Address  
7 6 5 4  
3
2 1 0  
Instruction  
Dummy Cycles  
Data 1  
Figure 34  
RSFDP command sequence  
Datasheet  
68  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3  
Register Access commands  
10.3.1  
Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1 05h)  
The Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1) command allows the Status Register 1 contents of Quad SPI-1 to be read from  
IO1 and Quad SPI-2 to be read from IO5. The Status Register 1 contents may be read at any time, even while a  
program, erase, or write operation is in progress. It is possible to read the Status Register 1 continuously by  
providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The status is updated for each eight cycle read. The maximum clock  
frequency for the RDSR1 (05h) command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Status  
Updated Status  
Figure 35  
Dual-Quad Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1 05h) command sequence  
10.3.2  
Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h)  
The Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2) command allows the Status Register 2 contents of Quad SPI-1 to be read from  
IO1 and Quad SPI-2 to be read from IO5. The Status Register 2 contents may be read at any time, even while a  
program, erase, or write operation is in progress. It is possible to read the Status Register 2 continuously by  
providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The status is updated for each eight cycle read. The maximum clock  
frequency for the RDSR2 command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Status  
Updated Status  
Figure 36  
Dual-Quad Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
69  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.3  
Read Configuration Register (RDCR 35h)  
The Read Configuration Register (RDCR) command allows the Configuration Register contents of Quad SPI-1 to  
be read from IO1 and Quad SPI-2 to be read from IO5. It is possible to read the Configuration Register continuously  
by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The Configuration Register contents may be read at any time, even  
while a program, erase, or write operation is in progress.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Figure 37  
Dual-Quad Read Configuration Register (RDCR 35h) command sequence  
10.3.4  
Bank Register Read (BRRD 16h)  
The Read the Bank Register (BRRD) command allows the Bank address Register contents to be read from SO. The  
instruction is first shifted in from SI. Then the 8-bit Bank Register is shifted out on SO. It is possible to read the  
Bank Register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency  
for the BRRD command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO4  
IO5  
Phase  
Instruction  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Figure 38  
Read Bank Register (BRRD 16h) command  
Datasheet  
70  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.5  
Bank Register Write (BRWR 17h)  
The Bank Register Write (BRWR) command is used to write address bits above A23, into the Bank Address Register  
(BAR). The command is also used to write the Extended address control bit (EXTADD) that is also in BAR[7]. BAR  
provides the high order addresses needed by devices having more than 128 Mbits (16 Mbytes), when using 3-byte  
address commands without extended addressing enabled (BAR[7] EXTADD = 0). Because this command is part of  
the addressing method and is not changing data in the flash memory, this command does not require the WREN  
command to precede it.  
The BRWR instruction is entered, followed by the data byte on SI. The Bank Register is one data byte in length.  
The BRWR command has no effect on the P_ERR, E_ERR or WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers.  
Any bank address bit reserved for the future should always be written as ‘0.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
SO_IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 39  
Bank Register Write (BRWR 17h) command  
Datasheet  
71  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.6  
Bank Register Access (BRAC B9h)  
The Bank Register Read and Write commands provide full access to the Bank Address Register (BAR) but they are  
both commands that are not present in legacy SPI memory devices. Host system SPI memory controller  
interfaces may not be able to easily support such new commands. The Bank Register Access (BRAC) command  
uses the same command code and format as the Deep Power Down (DPD) command that is available in legacy  
SPI memories. The FL-S family does not support a DPD feature but assigns this legacy command code to the BRAC  
command to enable write access to the Bank Address Register for legacy systems that are able to send the legacy  
DPD (B9h) command.  
When the BRAC command is sent, the S79FL-S family device will then interpret an immediately following Write  
Register (WRR) command as a write to the lower address bits of the BAR. A WREN command is not used between  
the BRAC and WRR commands. Only the lower two bits of the first data byte following the WRR command code  
are used to load BAR[1:0]. The upper bits of that byte and the content of the optional WRR command second data  
byte are ignored. Following the WRR command the access to BAR is closed and the device interface returns to the  
standby state. The combined BRAC followed by WRR command sequence has no affect on the value of the ExtAdd  
bit (BAR[7]).  
Commands other than WRR may immediately follow BRAC and execute normally. However, any command other  
than WRR, or any other sequence in which CS# goes low and returns high, following a BRAC command, will close  
the access to BAR and return to the normal interpretation of a WRR command as a write to Status Register 1 and  
the Configuration Register.  
The BRAC + WRR sequence is allowed only when the device is in standby, program suspend, or erase suspend  
states. This command sequence is illegal when the device is performing an embedded algorithm or when the  
program (P_ERR) or erase (E_ERR) status bits are set to ‘1.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 40  
BRAC (B9h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
72  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.7  
Write Registers (WRR 01h)  
The Write Registers (WRR) command allows new values to be written to both the Status Register 1 and  
Configuration Register. Before the Write Registers (WRR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable  
(WREN) command must be received. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully,  
the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The Write Registers (WRR) command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data bytes for Quad SPI-1 on  
IO0 and for Quad SPI-2 on IO4. The Status Register is one data byte in length.  
The Write Registers (WRR) command will set the P_ERR or E_ERR bits if there is a failure in the WRR operation.  
Any Status or Configuration Register bit reserved for the future must be written as ‘0.  
CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the eighth or sixteenth bit of data has been latched. If not, the  
Write Registers (WRR) command is not executed. If CS# is driven HIGH after the eighth cycle then only the Status  
Register 1 is written; otherwise, after the sixteenth cycle both the Status and Configuration Registers are written.  
When the configuration register QUAD bit CR[1] is ‘1, only the WRR command format with 16 data bits may be  
used.  
As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the self-timed Write Registers (WRR) operation is initiated. While  
the Write Registers (WRR) operation is in progress, the Status Register may still be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the self-timed Write Registers (WRR)  
operation, and is ‘0’ when it is completed. When the Write Registers (WRR) operation is completed, the Write  
Enable Latch (WEL) is set to ‘0. The maximum clock frequency for the WRR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
SO_IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Input Status Register-1  
Instruction  
Figure 41  
Dual-Quad Write Registers  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
SO_IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Input Status Register-1 Input Conf Register-1  
Instruction  
Figure 42  
Dual-Quad Write Registers (WRR 01h) command sequence  
The Write Registers (WRR) command allows the user to change the values of the Block Protect (BP2, BP1, and  
BP0) bits to define the size of the area that is to be treated as read-only. The Write Registers (WRR) command also  
allows the user to set the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit to ‘1’ or ‘0. The Status Register Write Disable  
(SRWD) bit allows the BP bits to be hardware protected.  
Datasheet  
73  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
When the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit of the Status Register is ‘0’ (its initial delivery state), it is  
possible to write to the Status Register provided that the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit has previously been set by  
a Write Enable (WREN) command.  
The WRR command has an alternate function of loading the Bank Address Register if the command immediately  
follows a BRAC command. See “Bank Register Access (BRAC B9h)” on page 72.  
10.3.8  
Write Enable (WREN 06h)  
The Write Enable (WREN) command sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit of the Status Register 1 (SR1[1]) to ‘1.  
The Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit must be set to ‘1’ by issuing the Write Enable (WREN) command to enable write,  
program and erase commands.  
CS# must be driven into the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on IO0  
for Quad SPI-1 and IO4 for Quad SPI-2. Without CS# being driven to the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of the  
instruction byte has been latched in on IO0 for Quad SPI-1 and IO4 for Quad SPI-2, the write enable operation will  
not be executed.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 43  
Dual-Quad Write Enable (WREN 06h) command sequence  
10.3.9  
Write Disable (WRDI 04h)  
The Write Disable (WRDI) command sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit of the Status Register 1 (SR1[1]) to ‘0.  
The Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit may be set to ‘0’ by issuing the Write Disable (WRDI) command to disable Page  
Program (PP), Sector Erase (SE), Bulk Erase (BE), Write Registers (WRR), OTP Program (OTPP), and other  
commands, that require WEL be set to ‘1’ for execution. The WRDI command can be used by the user to protect  
memory areas against inadvertent writes that can possibly corrupt the contents of the memory. The WRDI  
command is ignored during an embedded operation while WIP bit = 1.  
CS# must be driven into the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on IO0  
for Quad SPI-1 and IO4 for Quad SPI-2. Without CS# being driven to the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of the  
instruction byte has been latched in on IO0 for Quad SPI-1 and IO4 for Quad SPI-2, the write disable operation will  
not be executed.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 44  
Dual-Quad Write Disable (WRDI 04h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
74  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.10  
Clear Status Register (CLSR 30h)  
The Clear Status Register command resets bit SR1[5] (Erase Fail Flag) and bit SR1[6] (Program Fail Flag). It is not  
necessary to set the WEL bit before the Clear SR command is executed. The Clear SR command will be accepted  
even when the device remains busy with WIP set to ‘1, as the device does remain busy when either error bit is  
set. The WEL bit will be unchanged after this command is executed.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 45  
Dual-Quad Clear Status Register (CLSR 30h) command sequence  
10.3.11  
ECC Status Register Read (ECCRD 18h)  
To read the ECC Status Register, the command is followed by the ECC unit (32 bit) address, the four least  
significant bits (LSB) of address must be set to zero. This is followed by eight dummy cycles. Then the 8-bit  
contents of the ECC Register, for the ECC unit selected, are shifted out on SO 16 times, once for each byte in the  
ECC Unit. If CS# remains low the next ECC unit status is sent through SO 16 times, once for each byte in the ECC  
Unit, this continues until CS# goes high. The maximum operating clock frequency for the ECC READ command is  
133 MHz. See “Automatic ECC” on page 89 for details on ECC unit.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
31  
31  
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Dummy Cycles  
Data Out  
Figure 46  
ECC Status Register Read command sequence  
Note  
44.Data Out for Quad SPI-1 is IO1, Quad SPI-2 is IO5.  
Datasheet  
75  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.12  
AutoBoot  
SPI devices normally require 32 or more cycles of command and address shifting to initiate a read command. And,  
in order to read boot code from an SPI device, the host memory controller or processor must supply the read  
command from a hardwired state machine or from some host processor internal ROM code.  
Parallel NOR devices need only an initial address, supplied in parallel in a single cycle, and initial access time to  
start reading boot code.  
The AutoBoot feature allows the host memory controller to take boot code from a S79FL01GS device immediately  
after the end of reset, without having to send a read command. This saves 32 or more cycles and simplifies the  
logic needed to initiate the reading of boot code.  
• As part of the power up reset, hardware reset, or command reset process the AutoBoot feature automatically  
starts a read access from a pre-specified address. At the time the reset process is completed, the device is ready  
to deliver code from the starting address. The host memory controller only needs to drive CS# signal from HIGH  
to LOW and begin toggling the SCK signal. The S79FL01GS device will delay code output for a pre-specified  
number of clock cycles before code streams out.  
- The Auto Boot Start Delay (ABSD) field of the AutoBoot register specifies the initial delay if any is needed by  
the host.  
- The host cannot send commands during this time.  
- If ABSD = 0, the maximum SCK frequency is 50 MHz.  
- If ABSD > 0, the maximum SCK frequency is 133 MHz if the QUAD bit CR1[1] is ‘0’ or 104 MHz if the QUAD bit is ‘1.  
• The starting address of the boot code is selected by the value programmed into the AutoBoot Start Address  
(ABSA) field of the AutoBoot Register which specifies a 512 byte boundary aligned location; the default address  
is 00000000h.  
- Data will continuously shift out until CS# returns HIGH.  
• At any point after the first data byte is transferred, when CS# returns HIGH, the SPI device will reset to standard  
SPI mode; able to accept normal command operations.  
- A minimum of one byte must be transferred.  
- AutoBoot mode will not initiate again until another power cycle or a reset occurs.  
• An AutoBoot Enable bit (ABE) is set to enable the AutoBoot feature.  
The AutoBoot register bits are nonvolatile and provide:  
• The starting address (512-byte boundary), set by the AutoBoot Start Address (ABSA). The size of the ABSA field  
is 23 bits for devices up to 32-Gbit.  
• The number of initial delay cycles, set by the AutoBoot Start Delay (ABSD) 8-bit count value.  
• The AutoBoot Enable.  
With the configuration register QUAD bit CR1[1] is set to ‘1, the boot code will be provided 4 bits per cycle in the  
same manner as a Read Quad Out command.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 4  
1 5  
2 6  
3 7  
4 0 4 0  
5 1 5 1  
6 2 6 2  
7 3 7 3  
IO2  
IO3  
IO4  
4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0  
5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1  
6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2  
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3  
IO5  
IO6  
IO7  
Phase  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7  
...  
Wait States (ABSD)  
Figure 47  
AutoBoot sequence (CR1[1] = 1)  
Datasheet  
76  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.13  
AutoBoot Register Read (ABRD 14h)  
The AutoBoot Register Read command is shifted into SI. Then the 32-bit AutoBoot Register is shifted out on SO,  
least significant byte first, most significant bit of each byte first. It is possible to read the AutoBoot Register  
continuously by providing multiples of 32 clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for ABRD  
command is 104 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
SO_IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO4  
IO5  
Phase  
Instruction  
Data 1  
Data N  
Figure 48  
AutoBoot Register Read (ABRD 14h) command  
10.3.14  
AutoBoot Register Write (ABWR 15h)  
Before the ABWR command can be accepted, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by  
the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The ABWR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data bytes on SI, least significant byte first,  
most significant bit of each byte first. The ABWR data is 32 bits in length.  
The ABWR command has status reported in Status Register 1 as both an erase and a programming operation. An  
E_ERR or a P_ERR may be set depending on whether the erase or programming phase of updating the register  
fails.  
CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the 32nd bit of data has been latched. If not, the ABWR command  
is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the self-timed ABWR operation is initiated. While  
the ABWR operation is in progress, Status Register 1 may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP)  
bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the self-timed ABWR operation, and is ‘0’ when it is completed.  
When the ABWR cycle is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to ‘0. The maximum clock frequency for  
the ABWR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
SO_IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data 1  
Figure 49  
AutoBoot Register Write (ABWR) command  
Datasheet  
77  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.15  
Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h)  
Before the Program NVDLR (PNVDLR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command  
must be issued and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded  
successfully, the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) to enable the PNVDLR operation.  
The PNVDLR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data byte on SI-IO0 for Quad SPI-1 and IO4  
for Quad SPI-2.  
CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the eighth (8th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the PNVDLR  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the self-timed PNVDLR operation is  
initiated. While the PNVDLR operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the self-timed PNVDLR cycle, and is a ‘0’  
when it is completed. The PNVDLR operation can report a program error in the P_ERR bit of the status register.  
When the PNVDLR operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to ‘0. The maximum clock  
frequency for the PNVDLR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
SO_IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 50  
Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h) command sequence  
10.3.16  
Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah)  
Before the Write VDLR (WVDLR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully,  
the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) to enable WVDLR operation.  
The WVDLR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data byte on SI-IO0 for Quad SPI-1 and IO4  
for Quad SPI-2.  
CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the eighth (8th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the WVDLR  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the WVDLR operation is initiated with  
no delays. The maximum clock frequency for the PNVDLR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
SO_IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 51  
Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah) command sequence  
Datasheet  
78  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.3.17  
Data Learning Pattern Read (DLPRD 41h)  
The instruction is shifted on SI_IO0, then the 8-bit DLP is shifted out on SO_IO1 and IO5. It is possible to read the  
DLP continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the  
DLPRD command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
SO_IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO4  
IO5  
Phase  
Instruction  
Data 1  
Data N  
Figure 52  
Dual-Quad DLP Read (DLPRD 41h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
79  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.4  
Read Memory Array commands  
Read commands for the main flash array provide many options for prior generation SPI compatibility or  
enhanced performance SPI:  
• Some commands transfer address or data on each rising edge of SCK. These are called Single Data Rate  
commands (SDR).  
• Some SDR commands transfer address one bit per rising edge of SCK and return data 2, or 8 bits of data per  
rising edge of SCK. These are called Read or Fast Read for 2-bit data; Quad Output for 8-bit data.  
• Some SDR commands transfer both address and data 8 bits per rising edge of SCK. These are called Quad I/O  
for 8 bit.  
• Some commands transfer address and data on both the rising edge and falling edge of SCK. These are called  
Double Data Rate (DDR) commands.  
• There are DDR commands for 1, or 4 bits of address per each die or 8 bit data per SCK edge. These are called  
Fast DDR for 1-bit, and Quad I/O DDR for 8-bit per edge transfer.  
All of these commands begin with an instruction code that is transferred one bit per SCK rising edge. The  
instruction is followed by either a 3- or 4-byte address transferred at SDR or DDR. Commands transferring address  
or data 4-bits per clock edge per die are called Multiple I/O (MIO) commands. For FL-S devices at 256 Mbits or  
higher density, the traditional SPI 3-byte addresses are unable to directly address all locations in the memory  
array. These device have a bank address register that is used with 3-byte address commands to supply the high  
order address bits beyond the address from the host system. The default bank address is ‘0. Commands are  
provided to load and read the bank address register. These devices may also be configured to take a 4-byte  
address from the host system with the traditional 3-byte address commands. The 4-byte address mode for  
traditional commands is activated by setting the External Address (EXTADD) bit in the bank address register to ‘1.  
The Quad I/O commands provide a performance improvement option controlled by mode bits that are sent  
following the address bits. The mode bits indicate whether the command following the end of the current read  
will be another read of the same type, without an instruction at the beginning of the read. These mode bits give  
the option to eliminate the instruction cycles when doing a series of Quad I/O read accesses.  
Some commands require delay cycles following the address or mode bits to allow time to access the memory  
array. The delay cycles are traditionally called dummy cycles. The dummy cycles are ignored by the memory thus  
any data provided by the host during these cycles is ‘don’t care’ and the host may also leave the SI signal at high  
impedance during the dummy cycles. When MIO commands are used the host must stop driving the IO signals  
(outputs are high impedance) before the end of last dummy cycle. When DDR commands are used the host must  
not drive the I/O signals during any dummy cycle. The number of dummy cycles varies with the SCK frequency or  
performance option selected via the Configuration Register 1 (CR1) Latency Code (LC). Dummy cycles are  
measured from SCK falling edge to next SCK falling edge. SPI outputs are traditionally driven to a new value on  
the falling edge of each SCK. Zero dummy cycles means the returning data is driven by the memory on the same  
falling edge of SCK that the host stops driving address or mode bits.  
The DDR commands may optionally have an 8-edge Data Learning Pattern (DLP) driven by the memory, on all  
data outputs, in the dummy cycles immediately before the start of data. The DLP can help the host memory  
controller determine the phase shift from SCK to data edges so that the memory controller can capture data at  
the center of the data eye.  
When using SDR I/O commands at higher SCK frequencies (>50 MHz), an LC that provides one or more dummy  
cycles should be selected to allow additional time for the host to stop driving before the memory starts driving  
data, to minimize I/O driver conflict. When using DDR I/O commands with the DLP enabled, an LC that provides  
five or more dummy cycles should be selected to allow one cycle of additional time for the host to stop driving  
before the memory starts driving the 4 cycle DLP.  
Each read command ends when CS# is returned HIGH at any point during data return. CS# must not be returned  
HIGH during the mode or dummy cycles before data returns as this may cause mode bits to be captured  
incorrectly; making it indeterminate as to whether the device remains in enhanced high performance read mode.  
Datasheet  
80  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.4.1  
Read (Read 03h or 4READ 13h)  
The instruction  
• 03h (ExtAdd = 0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0) or  
• 03h (ExtAdd = 1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0) or  
• 13h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0)  
Then the memory contents, at the address given, are shifted out on IO1 and IO5. The maximum operating clock  
frequency for the READ command is 50 MHz.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Data 1  
Data N  
Figure 53  
Dual-Quad Read command sequence (READ 03h or 13h)  
Note  
45.A = MSB of address = 23 for command 03h, or 31 for command 13h.  
Datasheet  
81  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.4.2  
Fast Read (FAST_READ 0Bh or 4FAST_READ 0Ch)  
The instruction  
• 0Bh (ExtAdd = 0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0) or  
• 0Bh (ExtAdd = 1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0) or  
• 0Ch is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0)  
The address is followed by zero or eight dummy cycles depending on the latency code set in the Configuration  
Register. The dummy cycles allow the device internal circuits additional time for accessing the initial address  
location. During the dummy cycles the data value on IO1 and IO5 is ‘don’t care’ and may be high impedance. Then  
the memory contents, at the address given, are shifted out on IO1 and IO5.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for FAST READ command is 133 MHz.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
31  
31  
1
1
0
0
3
7
2
6
1
5
0
4
3
7
2
6
1
5
0
4
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Dummy Cycles  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 54  
Dual-Quad SPI Fast Read (FAST_READ) command sequence  
Datasheet  
82  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.4.3  
Quad Output Read (QOR 6Bh or 4QOR 6Ch)  
The instruction  
• 6Bh (ExtAdd = 0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0) or  
• 6Bh (ExtAdd = 1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0) or  
• 6Ch is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0)  
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out eight bits at a time through IO0–IO7. Each nibble  
(4 bits) is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for Quad Output Read command is 104 MHz. For Quad Output Read  
Mode, there may be dummy cycles required after the last address bit is shifted into SI before data begins shifting  
out of IO0–IO3. This latency period (i.e., dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry enough time to set  
up for the initial address. During the dummy cycles, the data value on IO0–IO7 is ‘don’t care’ and may be high  
impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK (refer to Table 19).  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
1
1
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IO2  
IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6  
IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Dummy  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5  
Figure 55  
Dual-Quad, Quad Output Read (QOR 6Bh or 4QOR 6Ch) command sequence  
Note  
46.A = MSB of address = 23 for command 6Bh, or 31 for command 6Ch.  
Datasheet  
83  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.4.4  
Quad I/O Read (QIOR EBh or 4QIOR ECh)  
The instruction  
• EBh (ExtAdd = 0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0) or  
• EBh (ExtAdd = 1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0) or  
• ECh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0)  
The Quad I/O Read command improves throughput with eight I/O signals — IO0–IO7. It is similar to the Quad  
Output Read command but allows input of the address bits eight bits per serial SCK clock. In some applications,  
the reduced instruction overhead might allow for code execution (XIP) directly from the S79FL01GS device.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for Quad I/O Read is 104 MHz.  
For the Quad I/O Read command, there is a latency required after the mode bits (described below) before data  
begins shifting out of IO0–IO7. This latency period (i.e., dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry  
enough time to access data at the initial address. During latency cycles, the data value on IO0–IO7 are ‘don’t care’  
and may be high impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK and the latency  
code table (refer to Table 19). The number of dummy cycles is set by the LC bits in the Configuration Register  
(CR1). However, both latency code tables use the same latency values for the Quad I/O Read command.  
Following the latency period, the memory contents at the address given, is shifted out eight bits at a time through  
IO0–IO7. Each byte (8 bits) is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
Address jumps can be done without the need for additional Quad I/O Read instructions. This is controlled through  
the setting of the Mode bits (after the address sequence, as shown in Figure 56 or Figure 57). This added feature  
removes the need for the instruction sequence and greatly improves code execution (XIP). The upper nibble (bits  
7–4) of the Mode bits control the length of the next Quad I/O instruction through the inclusion or exclusion of the  
first byte instruction code. The lower nibble (bits 3–0) of the Mode bits are ‘don’t care’ (x). If the Mode bits equal  
Axh, then the device remains in Quad I/O High Performance Read Mode and the next address can be entered (after  
CS# is raised high and then asserted low) without requiring the EBh or ECh instruction, as shown in Figure 56;  
thus, eliminating eight cycles for the command sequence. The following sequences will release the device from  
Quad I/O High Performance Read mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI commands:  
1. During the Quad I/O Read Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are any value other than Axh, then the next  
time CS# is raised HIGH the device will be released from Quad I/O High Performance Read mode.  
During any operation, if CS# toggles HIGH to LOW to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (IO0–IO3) are  
not set for a valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from Quad I/O High Performance Read  
mode. Note that the two mode bit clock cycles and additional wait states (i.e., dummy cycles) allow the device’s  
internal circuitry latency time to access the initial address after the last address cycle that is clocked into IO0–IO3.  
It is important that the IO0–IO7 signals be set to high-impedance at or before the falling edge of the first data out  
clock. At higher clock speeds the time available to turn off the host outputs before the memory device begins to  
drive (bus turn around) is diminished. It is allowed and may be helpful in preventing IO0–IO7 signal contention,  
for the host system to turn off the IO0–IO7 signal outputs (make them high impedance) during the last ‘don’t care’  
mode cycle or during any dummy cycles.  
CS# should not be driven HIGH during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate.  
Datasheet  
84  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
A
4
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IO2  
IO3  
IO4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
A
IO5  
IO6  
IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
D1 D2 D3 D4  
Figure 56  
Dual-Quad I/O Read command sequence (3-Byte Address, EBh [ExtAdd = 0], LC = 00b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
A
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IO1  
5
IO2  
6
IO3  
7
IO4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
A
4
IO5  
5
IO6  
6
7
IO7  
Phase  
DN-1 DN  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
D1 D2 D3 D4  
Figure 57  
Dual-Quad Continuous Quad I/O Read command sequence (3-Byte Address), LC = 00b  
Note  
47.A = MSB of address = 23 for command EBh, or 31 for command ECh.  
Datasheet  
85  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.4.5  
DDR Quad I/O Read (EDh, EEh)  
The Read DDR Quad I/O command is similar to the Quad I/O Read command but allows input of the address four  
bits on every edge of the clock. In some applications, the reduced instruction overhead might allow for code  
execution (XIP) directly from the S79FL01GS device. The QUAD bit of the Configuration Register is set (CR[1] = 1)  
to enable the Quad capability in the S79FL01GS device.  
The instruction  
• EDh (ExtAdd = 0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0) or  
• EDh (ExtAdd = 1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0) or  
• EEh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0)  
The address is followed by mode bits. Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out, in a DDR  
fashion, with four bits at a time on each clock edge through IO0–IO7.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for Read DDR Quad I/O command is 80 MHz.  
For Read DDR Quad I/O, there is a latency required after the last address and mode bits are shifted into the  
IO0–IO7 signals before data begins shifting out of IO0–IO7. This latency period (dummy cycles) allows the device’s  
internal circuitry enough time to access the initial address. During these latency cycles, the data value on  
IO0–IO7 are ‘don’t care’ and may be high impedance. When the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) is enabled the host  
system must not drive the IO signals during the dummy cycles. The IO signals must be left high impedance by the  
host so that the memory device can drive the DLP during the dummy cycles.  
The number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK. The number of dummy cycles is set by the  
LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1).  
Both latency tables provide cycles for mode bits so a series of Quad I/O DDR commands may eliminate the 8-bit  
instruction after the first command sends a complementary mode bit pattern, as shown in Figure 58. This feature  
removes the need for the eight bit SDR instruction sequence and dramatically reduces initial access times  
(improves XIP performance). The Mode bits control the length of the next Read DDR Quad I/O operation through  
the inclusion or exclusion of the first byte instruction code. If the upper nibble (IO[7:4]) and lower nibble (IO[3:0])  
of the Mode bits are complementary (i.e. 5h and Ah) the device transitions to Continuous Read DDR Quad I/O  
Mode and the next address can be entered (after CS# is raised HIGH and then asserted LOW) without requiring  
the EDh or EEh instruction, as shown in Figure 59 thus, eliminating eight cycles from the command sequence.  
The following sequences will release the device from Continuous Read DDR Quad I/O mode; after which, the  
device can accept standard SPI commands:  
1. During the Read DDR Quad I/O Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are not complementary the next time CS#  
is raised HIGH and then asserted LOW the device will be released from Read DDR Quad I/O mode.  
2. During any operation, if CS# toggles HIGH to LOW to HIGH for eight cycles (or less) and data input (IO0–IO7) are  
not set for a valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from Read DDR Quad I/O mode.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS# should not be driven HIGH during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate. The  
HOLD function is not valid during Quad I/O DDR commands.  
Note that the memory devices drive the IOs with a preamble prior to the first data value. The preamble is a pattern  
that is used by the host controller to optimize data capture at higher frequencies. The preamble drives the IO bus  
for the four clock cycles immediately before data is output. The host must be sure to stop driving the IO bus prior  
to the time that the memory starts outputting the preamble.  
Datasheet  
86  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
The preamble is intended to give the host controller an indication about the round trip time from when the host  
drives a clock edge to when the corresponding data value returns from the memory device. The host controller  
will skew the data capture point during the preamble period to optimize timing margins and then use the same  
skew time to capture the data during the rest of the read operation. The optimized capture point will be  
determined during the preamble period of every read operation. This optimization strategy is intended to  
compensate for both the PVT (process, voltage, temperature) of both the memory device and the host controller  
as well as any system level delays caused by flight time on the PCB.  
Although the data learning pattern (DLP) is programmable, the following example shows example of the DLP of  
34h. The DLP 34h (or 00110100) will be driven on each of the active outputs (i.e. all eight IOs). This pattern was  
chosen to cover both DC and AC data transition scenarios. The two DC transition scenarios include data low for  
a long period of time (two half clocks) followed by a high going transition (001) and the complementary low going  
transition (110). The two AC transition scenarios include data low for a short period of time (one half clock)  
followed by a high going transition (101) and the complementary low going transition (010). The DC transitions  
will typically occur with a starting point closer to the supply rail than the AC transitions that may not have fully  
settled to their steady state (DC) levels. In many cases the DC transitions will bound the beginning of the data  
valid period and the AC transitions will bound the ending of the data valid period. These transitions will allow the  
host controller to identify the beginning and ending of the valid data eye. Once the data eye has been  
characterized the optimal data capture point can be chosen. See “SPI DDR Data Learning Registers” on page 52  
for more details.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
A
8
9
4
5
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IO2  
10 6  
11 7  
IO3  
IO4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
A
8
9
4
5
IO5  
IO6  
10 6  
IO7  
3
7
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
DLP  
D1D2  
Figure 58  
Dual-Quad SPI DDR Quad I/O Read Initial Access  
Notes  
48.A = MSB of address = 23 for command EDh, or 31 for command EEh.  
49.Example DLP of 34h (or 00110100).  
Datasheet  
87  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
A
8
9
4
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IO2  
10  
11  
8
IO3  
IO4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
A
IO5  
9
IO6  
10  
11  
IO7  
Phase  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
DLP  
D1 D2  
Figure 59  
Dual-Quad Continuous DDR Quad I/O Read Subsequent Access  
Notes  
50.A = MSB of address = 23 for command EDh, or 31 for command EEh.  
51.Example DLP of 34h (or 00110100).  
Datasheet  
88  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.5  
Program Flash Array commands  
Program granularity  
Automatic ECC  
10.5.1  
10.5.1.1  
Each 16 byte aligned and 16 byte length Programming Block has a hidden error correction code (ECC) value. The  
data block plus ECC form an ECC unit. In combination with EDC logic the ECC is used to detect and correct any  
single bit error found during a read access. When data is first programmed within an ECC unit the ECC value is set  
for the entire ECC unit. If the same ECC unit is programmed more than once the ECC value is changed to disable  
the error detection and correction (EDC) function. A sector erase is needed to again enable Automatic ECC on that  
Programming Block. The 16 byte Program Block is the smallest program granularity on which Automatic ECC is  
enabled.  
These are automatic operations transparent to the user. The transparency of the Automatic ECC feature  
enhances data accuracy for typical programming operations which write data once to each ECC unit but,  
facilitates software compatibility to previous generations of FL-S family of products by allowing for single byte  
programming and bit walking in which the same ECC unit is programmed more than once. When an ECC unit has  
Automatic ECC disabled, EDC is not done on data read from the ECC unit location.  
An ECC status register is provided for determining if ECC is enabled on an ECC unit and whether any errors have  
been detected and corrected in the ECC unit data or the ECC (See “ECC Status Register (ECCSR)” on  
page 49.)The ECC Status Register Read (ECCRD) command is used to read the ECC status on any ECC unit.  
EDC is applied to all parts of the Flash address spaces other than registers. An ECC is calculated for each group of  
bytes protected and the ECC is stored in a hidden area related to the group of bytes. The group of protected bytes  
and the related ECC are together called an ECC unit.  
ECC is calculated for each 16 byte aligned and length ECC unit.  
• Single Bit EDC is supported with 8 ECC bits per ECC unit, plus 1-bit for an ECC disable Flag.  
• Sector erase resets all ECC bits and ECC disable flags in a sector to the default state (enabled).  
• ECC is programmed as part of the standard Program commands operation.  
• ECC is disabled automatically if multiple programming operations are done on the same ECC unit.  
• Single byte programming or bit walking is allowed but disables ECC on the second program to the same 16-byte  
ECC unit.  
• The ECC disable flag is programmed when ECC is disabled.  
• To re-enable ECC for an ECC unit that has been disabled, the Sector that includes the ECC unit must be erased.  
• To ensure the best data integrity provided by EDC, each ECC unit should be programmed only once so that ECC  
is stored for that unit and not disabled.  
• The calculation, programming, and disabling of ECC is done automatically as part of a programming operation.  
The detection and correction, if needed, is done automatically as part of read operations. The host system sees  
only corrected data from a read operation.  
• ECC protects the OTP region - however a second program operation on the same ECC unit will disable ECC  
permanently on that ECC unit (OTP is one time programmable, hence an erase operation to re-enable the ECC  
enable/indicator bit is prohibited).  
Datasheet  
89  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.5.1.2  
Page programming  
Page programming is done by loading a Page Buffer with data to be programmed and issuing a programming  
command to move data from the buffer to the memory array. This sets an upper limit on the amount of data that  
can be programmed with a single programming command. Page programming allows up to a page size (1024  
bytes) to be programmed in one operation. The page is aligned on the page size address boundary. It is possible  
to program from one bit up to a page size in each Page programming operation. It is recommended that a  
multiple of 16 byte length and aligned Program Blocks be written. For the very best performance, programming  
should be done in full pages of 512 bytes aligned on 512-byte boundaries with each Page being programmed only  
once.  
10.5.1.3  
Single byte programming  
Single byte programming allows full backward compatibility to the standard SPI page programming (PP)  
command by allowing a single byte to be programmed anywhere in the memory array.  
10.5.2  
Page Program (PP 02h or 4PP 12h)  
The Page Program (PP) commands allows bytes to be programmed in the memory (changing bits from ‘1’ to ‘0’).  
Before the Page Program (PP) commands can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully,  
the device sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The instruction  
• 02h (ExtAdd = 0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0) or  
• 02h (ExtAdd = 1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0) or  
• 12h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0)  
and at least one data byte on IO0 and IO4. Up to a page can be provided on IO0 and IO4 after the 3-byte address  
with instruction 02h or 4-byte address with instruction 12h has been provided. If the 9 least significant address  
bits (A8–A0) are not all zero, all transmitted data that goes beyond the end of the current page are programmed  
from the start address of the same page (from the address whose 9 least significant bits (A8–A0) are all zero) i.e.  
the address wraps within the page aligned address boundaries. This is a result of only requiring the user to enter  
one single page address to cover the entire page boundary.  
If less than a page of data is sent to the device, these data bytes will be programmed in sequence, starting at the  
provided address within the page, without having any affect on the other bytes of the same page.  
For optimized timings, using the Page Program (PP) command to load the entire page size program buffer within  
the page boundary will save overall programming time versus loading less than a page size into the program  
buffer.  
The programming process is managed by the flash memory device internal control logic. After a programming  
command is issued, the programming operation status can be checked using the Read Status Register 1  
command. The WIP bit (SR1[0]) will indicate when the programming operation is completed. The P_ERR bit  
(SR1[6]) will indicate if an error occurs in the programming operation that prevents successful completion of  
programming.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
3
7
2
6
1
5
0
4
3
7
2
6
1
5
0
4
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Input Data1  
Input Data 2  
Figure 60  
Dual-Quad Page Program (PP 02h or 4PP 12h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
90  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.5.3  
Quad Page Program (QPP 32h or 38h, or 4QPP 34h)  
The Quad-input Page Program (QPP) command allows bytes to be programmed in the memory (changing bits  
from ‘1’ to ‘0’). The Quad-input Page Program (QPP) command allows up to a page size (512 bytes) of data to be  
loaded into the Page Buffer using eight signals: IO0–IO7. QPP can improve performance for PROM Programmer  
and applications that have slower clock speeds (< 12 MHz) by loading 8 bits of data per clock cycle. Systems with  
faster clock speeds do not realize as much benefit for the QPP command since the inherent page program time  
becomes greater than the time it takes to clock-in the data. The maximum frequency for the QPP command is  
80 MHz.  
To use Quad Page Program the Quad Enable Bit in the Configuration Register must be set (QUAD = 1). A Write  
Enable command must be executed before the device will accept the QPP command (Status Register-1, WEL = 1).  
The instruction  
• 32h (ExtAdd = 0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0) or  
• 32h (ExtAdd = 1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0) or  
• 38h (ExtAdd = 0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0) or  
• 38h (ExtAdd = 1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0) or  
• 34h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0)  
and at least two data bytes, into the IO signals. Data must be programmed at previously erased (FFh) memory  
locations.  
QPP requires programming to be done one full page at a time. While less than a full page of data may be loaded  
for programming, the entire page is considered programmed, any locations not filled with data will be left as  
ones, the same page must not be programmed more than once.  
All other functions of QPP are identical to Page Program. The QPP command sequence is shown in the Figure 61.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
1
1
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
0
1
0
1
IO2  
2
2
2
IO3  
3
3
3
IO4  
4
4
4
IO5  
5
5
5
IO6  
6
6
6
IO7  
7
7
7
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
D1 D2  
D3  
D4  
...  
Figure 61  
Dual-Quad, Quad Page Program command sequence  
Note  
52.A = MSB of address = A23 for PP 02h, or A31 for PP 02h, or for 4PP 12h.  
Datasheet  
91  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.5.4  
Program Suspend (PGSP 85h) and Resume (PGRS 8Ah)  
The Program Suspend command allows the system to interrupt a programming operation and then read from  
any other non-erase-suspended sector or non-program-suspended-page. Program Suspend is valid only during  
a programming operation.  
Commands allowed after the Program Suspend command is issued:  
• Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1 05h)  
• Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h)  
The Write in Progress (WIP) bit in Status Register 1 (SR1[0]) must be checked to know when the programming  
operation has stopped. The Program Suspend Status bit in the Status Register 2 (SR2[0]) can be used to  
determine if a programming operation has been suspended or was completed at the time WIP changes to ‘0. The  
time required for the suspend operation to complete is tPSL, see Table 43.  
See Table 41 for the commands allowed while programming is suspend.  
The Program Resume command 8Ah must be written to resume the programming operation after a Program  
Suspend. If the programming operation was completed during the suspend operation, a resume command is not  
needed and has no effect if issued. Program Resume commands will be ignored unless a Program operation is  
suspended.  
After a Program Resume command is issued, the WIP bit in the Status Register 1 will be set to ‘1’ and the  
programming operation will resume. Program operations may be interrupted as often as necessary e.g. a  
program suspend command could immediately follow a program resume command but, in order for a program  
operation to progress to completion there must be some periods of time between resume and the next suspend  
command greater than or equal to tPRS. See Table 43.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 62  
Dual-Quad Program Suspend command sequence  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 63  
Dual_Quad Program Resume command sequence  
Datasheet  
92  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.6  
Erase Flash Array commands  
10.6.1  
Sector Erase (SE D8h or 4SE DCh)  
The Sector Erase (SE) command sets all bits in the addressed sector to ‘1’ (all bytes are FFh). Before the Sector  
Erase (SE) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and  
decoded by the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write  
operations.  
The instruction  
• D8h [ExtAdd = 0] is followed by a 3-byte address (A23–A0), or  
• D8h [ExtAdd = 1] is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0), or  
• DCh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31–A0)  
CS# must be driven into the logic HIGH state after the twenty-fourth or thirty-second bit of address has been  
latched in on IO0 and IO4. This will initiate the erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the  
chosen sector. If CS# is not driven HIGH after the last bit of address, the sector erase operation will not be  
executed.  
As soon as CS# is driven into the logic HIGH state, the internal erase cycle will be initiated. With the internal erase  
cycle in progress, the user can read the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to check if the operation has been  
completed. The WIP bit will indicate ‘1’ when the erase cycle is in progress and ‘0’ when the erase cycle has been  
completed.  
A Sector Erase (SE) command applied to a sector that has been Write Protected through the Block Protection bits  
or ASP, will not be executed and will set the E_ERR status.  
ASP has a PPB and a DYB protection bit for each sector.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Figure 64  
Dual-Quad Sector Erase (SE 20h or 4SE 21h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
93  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.6.2  
Bulk Erase (BE 60h or C7h)  
The Bulk Erase (BE) command sets all bits to ‘1’ (all bytes are FFh) inside the entire flash memory array. Before  
the BE command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded  
by the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
CS# must be driven into the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on IO0  
and IO4. This will initiate the erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the entire flash  
memory array. If CS# is not driven HIGH after the last bit of instruction, the BE operation will not be executed.  
As soon as CS# is driven into the logic HIGH state, the erase cycle will be initiated. With the erase cycle in progress,  
the user can read the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to determine when the operation has been  
completed. The WIP bit will indicate ‘1’ when the erase cycle is in progress and ‘0’ when the erase cycle has been  
completed.  
A BE command can be executed only when the Block Protection (BP2, BP1, BP0) bits are set to 0’s. If the BP bits  
are not ‘0, the BE command is not executed and E_ERR is not set. The BE command will skip any sectors  
protected by the DYB or PPB and the E_ERR status will not be set.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 65  
Bulk Erase command sequence  
Datasheet  
94  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.6.3  
Erase Suspend and Resume commands (ERSP 75h or ERRS 7Ah)  
The Erase Suspend command, allows the system to interrupt a sector erase operation and then read from or  
program data to, any other sector. Erase Suspend is valid only during a sector erase operation. The Erase Suspend  
command is ignored if written during the Bulk Erase operation.  
When the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase operation, the device requires a maximum  
of tESL (erase suspend latency) to suspend the erase operation and update the status bits. See Table 44.  
Commands allowed after the Erase Suspend command is issued:  
• Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1 05h)  
• Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h)  
The Write in Progress (WIP) bit in Status Register 1 (SR1[0]) must be checked to know when the erase operation  
has stopped. The Erase Suspend bit in Status Register 2 (SR2[1]) can be used to determine if an erase operation  
has been suspended or was completed at the time WIP changes to ‘0.  
If the erase operation was completed during the suspend operation, a resume command is not needed and has  
no effect if issued. Erase Resume commands will be ignored unless an Erase operation is suspended.  
See Table 41 for the commands allowed while erase is suspend.  
After the erase operation has been suspended, the sector enters the erase-suspend mode. The system can read  
data from or program data to the device. Reading at any address within an erase-suspended sector produces  
undetermined data.  
A WREN command is required before any command that will change nonvolatile data, even during erase suspend.  
The WRR and PPB Erase commands are not allowed during Erase Suspend, it is therefore not possible to alter the  
Block Protection or PPB bits during Erase Suspend. If there are sectors that may need programming during Erase  
suspend, these sectors should be protected only by DYB bits that can be turned off during Erase Suspend.  
However, WRR is allowed immediately following the BRAC command; in this special case the WRR is interpreted  
as a write to the Bank Address Register, not a write to SR1 or CR1.  
If a program command is sent for a location within an erase suspended sector the program operation will fail with  
the P_ERR bit set.  
After an erase-suspended program operation is complete, the device returns to the erase-suspend mode. The  
system can determine the status of the program operation by reading the WIP bit in the Status Register, just as  
in the standard program operation.  
The Erase Resume command 7Ah must be written to resume the erase operation if an Erase is suspend. Erase  
Resume commands will be ignored unless an Erase is Suspend.  
After an Erase Resume command is sent, the WIP bit in the status register will be set to ‘1’ and the erase operation  
will continue. Further Resume commands are ignored.  
Erase operations may be interrupted as often as necessary e.g. an erase suspend command could immediately  
follow an erase resume command but, in order for an erase operation to progress to completion there must be  
some periods of time between resume and the next suspend command greater than or equal to tERS. See  
Table 44.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 66  
Dual-Quad Erase Suspend command sequence  
Datasheet  
95  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 67  
Table 41  
Dual-Quad Erase Resume command sequence  
Commands allowed during Program or Erase Suspend  
Allowed  
Instruction  
Code  
Allowed  
during erase  
suspend  
Instruction  
name  
during  
program  
suspend  
Comment  
(Hex)  
Bank address register may need to be changed during a  
suspend to reach a sector for read or program.  
BRAC  
BRRD  
BRWR  
CLSR  
B9  
16  
17  
30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bank address register may need to be changed during a  
suspend to reach a sector for read or program.  
Bank address register may need to be changed during a  
suspend to reach a sector for read or program.  
Clear status may be used if a program operation fails  
during erase suspend.  
It may be necessary to remove and restore dynamic  
protection during erase suspend to allow programming  
during erase suspend.  
DYBRD  
DYBWR  
E0  
E1  
X
X
It may be necessary to remove and restore dynamic  
protection during erase suspend to allow programming  
during erase suspend.  
ERRS  
FAST_READ  
4FAST_READ  
MBR  
7A  
0B  
0C  
FF  
X
X
X
X
Required to resume from erase suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
X
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
May need to reset a read operation during suspend.  
Needed to resume a program operation. A program  
resume may also be used during nested program suspend  
within an erase suspend.  
PGRS  
8A  
X
X
PGSP  
PP  
85  
02  
12  
X
X
X
Program suspend allowed during erase suspend.  
Required for array program during erase suspend.  
Required for array program during erase suspend.  
4PP  
Allowed for checking persistent protection before  
PPBRD  
E2  
X
attempting a program command during erase suspend.  
QPP  
4QPP  
32, 38  
34  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Required for array program during erase suspend.  
Required for array program during erase suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
4READ  
RDCR  
13  
35  
DDRQIOR  
DDRQIOR4  
QIOR  
ED  
EE  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
EB  
4QIOR  
EC  
Datasheet  
96  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Table 41  
Commands allowed during Program or Erase Suspend (Continued)  
Allowed  
Instruction  
Code  
Allowed  
during erase  
suspend  
Instruction  
name  
during  
program  
suspend  
Comment  
(Hex)  
QOR  
4QOR  
RDSR1  
6B  
6C  
05  
X
X
X
X
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
Needed to read WIP to determine end of suspend process.  
Needed to read suspend status to determine whether the  
operation is suspended or complete.  
RDSR2  
07  
X
X
READ  
RESET  
WREN  
03  
F0  
06  
X
X
X
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
Reset allowed anytime.  
Required for program command within erase suspend.  
Bank register may need to be changed during a suspend to  
reach a sector needed for read or program. WRR is allowed  
when following BRAC.  
WRR  
01  
X
X
10.7  
One Time Program Array commands  
OTP Program (OTPP 42h)  
10.7.1  
The OTP Program command programs data in the One Time Program region, which is in a different address space  
from the main array data. The OTP region is 2048 bytes so, the address bits from A25 to A10 must be zero for this  
command. Refer to “OTP address space” on page 39 for details on the OTP region. The protocol of the OTP  
Program command is the same as the Page Program command. Before the OTP Program command can be  
accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which sets  
the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
To program the OTP array in bit granularity, the rest of the bits within a data byte can be set to ‘1.  
Each region in the OTP memory space can be programmed one or more times, provided that the region is not  
locked. Attempting to program zeros in a region that is locked will fail with the P_ERR bit in SR1 set to ‘1’  
Programming ones, even in a protected area does not cause an error and does not set P_ERR. Subsequent OTP  
programming can be performed only on the un-programmed bits (that is, 1 data). The protocol of the OTP  
Program command is the same as the Page Program command. See “Page Program (PP 02h or 4PP 12h)” on  
page 90 for the command sequence.  
Datasheet  
97  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.7.2  
OTP Read (OTPR 4Bh)  
The OTP Read command reads data from the OTP region. The OTP region is 2048 bytes so, the address bits from  
A25 to A10 must be zero for this command. Refer to “OTP address space” on page 39 for details on the OTP  
region. The protocol of the OTP Read command is similar to the Fast Read command except that it will not wrap  
to the starting address after the OTP address is at its maximum; instead, the data beyond the maximum OTP  
address will be undefined. Also, the OTP Read command is not affected by the latency code. The OTP read  
command always has one dummy byte of latency as shown in Figure 68.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
31  
31  
1
1
0
0
3
7
2
6
1
5
0
4
3
7
2
6
1
5
0
4
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Dummy Cycles  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 68  
Read OTP (OTPR 4Bh) command sequence  
Datasheet  
98  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.8  
Advanced Sector Protection commands  
ASP Read (ASPRD 2Bh)  
10.8.1  
The ASP Read instruction 2Bh is shifted into SI by the rising edge of the SCK signal. Then the 16-bit ASP register  
contents is shifted out on the serial output SO, least significant byte first. Each bit is shifted out at the SCK  
frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal. It is possible to read the ASP register continuously by providing  
multiples of 16 clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the ASP Read (ASPRD) command is  
133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
SO_IO1  
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Figure 69  
Dual-Quad SPI ASPRD command sequence  
10.8.2  
ASP Program (ASPP 2Fh)  
Before the ASP Program (ASPP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch  
(WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The ASPP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic LOW state, followed by the instruction and two data  
bytes on SI, least significant byte first. The ASP Register is two data bytes in length.  
The ASPP command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same manner  
as any other programming operation.  
CS# input must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the sixteenth bit of data has been latched in. If not, the  
ASPP command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the self-timed ASPP operation  
is initiated. While the ASPP operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the self-timed ASPP operation, and is ‘0’  
when it is completed. When the ASPP operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to ‘0.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input ASPR Low Byte  
Input IRP High Byte  
Figure 70  
ASPP (2Fh) command  
Datasheet  
99  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.8.3  
DYB Read (DYBRD E0h)  
The instruction E0h is latched into SI by the rising edge of the SCK signal. Followed by the 32-bit address selecting  
location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a particular density device  
must be zero). Then the 8-bit DYB access register contents are shifted out on the serial output SO. Each bit is  
shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal. It is possible to read the same DYB access  
register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The address of the DYB register does not  
increment so this is not a means to read the entire DYB array. Each location must be read with a separate DYB  
Read command. The maximum operating clock frequency for READ command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Address  
Instruction  
Register  
Repeat Register  
Figure 71  
DYBRD command sequence  
10.8.4  
DYB Write (DYBWR E1h)  
Before the DYB Write (DYBWR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch  
(WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The DYBWR command is entered by driving CS# to the logic LOW state, followed by the instruction, the 32-bit  
address selecting location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a  
particular density device must be zero), then the data byte on SI. The DYB Access Register is one data byte in  
length.  
The DYBWR command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same  
manner as any other programming operation. CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of  
data has been latched in. If not, the DYBWR command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH  
state, the self-timed DYBWR operation is initiated. While the DYBWR operation is in progress, the Status Register  
may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the  
self-timed DYBWR operation, and is ‘0’ when it is completed. When the DYBWR operation is completed, the Write  
Enable Latch (WEL) is set to ‘0.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
3
7
2
6
1
5
0
4
3
7
2
6
1
5
0
4
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Input Data1  
Input Data 2  
Figure 72  
DYBWR (E1h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
100  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.8.5  
PPB Read (PPBRD E2h)  
The instruction E2h is shifted into SI by the rising edges of the SCK signal, followed by the 32-bit address selecting  
location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a particular density device  
must be zero) Then the 8-bit PPB access register contents are shifted out on SO.  
It is possible to read the same PPB access register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The  
address of the PPB register does not increment so this is not a means to read the entire PPB array. Each location  
must be read with a separate PPB Read command. The maximum operating clock frequency for the PPB Read  
command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
SO_IO1  
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
DY  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Figure 73  
PPBRD (E2h) command sequence  
10.8.6  
PPB Program (PPBP E3h)  
Before the PPB Program (PPBP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch  
(WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The PPBP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic LOW state, followed by the instruction, followed by the  
32-bit address selecting location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a  
particular density device must be zero).  
The PPBP command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same manner  
as any other programming operation.  
CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the last bit of address has been latched in. If not, the PPBP  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the self-timed PPBP operation is  
initiated. While the PPBP operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the self-timed PPBP operation, and is ‘0’  
when it is completed. When the PPBP operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to ‘0.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
A
A
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Figure 74  
PPBP (E3h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
101  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.8.7  
PPB Erase (PPBE E4h)  
The PPB Erase (PPBE) command sets all PPB bits to ‘1. Before the PPB Erase command can be accepted by the  
device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which sets the Write Enable  
Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The instruction E4h is shifted into SI by the rising edges of the SCK signal.  
CS# must be driven into the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI.  
This will initiate the beginning of internal erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the entire  
PPB memory array. Without CS# being driven to the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of the instruction, the  
PPB erase operation will not be executed.  
With the internal erase cycle in progress, the user can read the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to check if  
the operation has been completed. The WIP bit will indicate ‘1, when the erase cycle is in progress and ‘0, when  
the erase cycle has been completed. Erase suspend is not allowed during PPB Erase.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 75  
PPB Erase (PPBE E4h) command sequence  
10.8.8  
PPB Lock Bit Read (PLBRD A7h)  
The PPB Lock Bit Read (PLBRD) command allows the PPB Lock Register contents to be read out of SO. It is  
possible to read the PPB lock register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The PPB Lock  
Register contents may only be read when the device is in standby state with no other operation in progress. It is  
recommended to check the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit of the Status Register before issuing a new command to  
the device.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
SO_IO1  
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
DY  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Figure 76  
PPB Lock Register Read command sequence  
Datasheet  
102  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.8.9  
PPB Lock Bit Write (PLBWR A6h)  
The PPB Lock Bit Write (PLBWR) command clears the PPB Lock Register to ‘0. Before the PLBWR command can  
be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which  
sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The PLBWR command is entered by driving CS# to the logic LOW state, followed by the instruction.  
CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the eighth bit of instruction has been latched in. If not, the PLBWR  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the self-timed PLBWR operation is  
initiated. While the PLBWR operation is in progress, the Status Register may still be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the self-timed PLBWR operation, and is ‘0’  
when it is completed. When the PLBWR operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to ‘0. The  
maximum clock frequency for the PLBWR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 77  
PPB Lock Bit Write (PLBWR A6h) command sequence  
10.8.10  
Password Read (PASSRD E7h)  
The correct password value may be read only after it is programmed and before the Password Mode has been  
selected by programming the Password Protection Mode bit to ‘0’ in the ASP Register (ASP[2]). After the Password  
Protection Mode is selected the PASSRD command is ignored.  
The PASSRD command is shifted into SI. Then the 64-bit Password is shifted out on the serial output SO, least  
significant byte first, most significant bit of each byte first. Each bit is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the  
falling edge of the SCK signal. It is possible to read the Password continuously by providing multiples of 64 clock  
cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the PASSRD command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI_IO0  
SO_IO1  
IO2-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5  
IO6-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Data 1  
Data 8  
Figure 78  
Password Read (PASSRD E7h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
103  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.8.11  
Password Program (PASSP E8h)  
Before the Password Program (PASSP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN)  
command must be issued and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been  
decoded, the device sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) to enable the PASSP operation.  
The password can only be programmed before the Password Mode is selected by programming the Password  
Protection Mode bit to ‘0’ in the ASP Register (ASP[2]). After the Password Protection Mode is selected the PASSP  
command is ignored.  
The PASSP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic LOW state, followed by the instruction and the  
password data bytes on SI, least significant byte first, most significant bit of each byte first. The password is  
sixty-four (64) bits in length.  
CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the sixty-fourth (64th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the  
PASSP command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the self-timed PASSP operation  
is initiated. While the PASSP operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the self-timed PASSP cycle, and is ‘0’ when  
it is completed. The PASSP command can report a program error in the P_ERR bit of the status register. When the  
PASSP operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to ‘0. The maximum clock frequency for the  
PASSP command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Password Byte 1  
Password Byte 8  
Figure 79  
Password Program (PASSP E8h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
104  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.8.12  
Password Unlock (PASSU E9h)  
The PASSU command is entered by driving CS# to the logic LOW state, followed by the instruction and the  
password data bytes on SI, least significant byte first, most significant bit of each byte first. The password is  
sixty-four (64) bits in length.  
CS# must be driven to the logic HIGH state after the sixty-fourth (64th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the  
PASSU command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic HIGH state, the self-timed PASSU operation  
is initiated. While the PASSU operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is ‘1’ during the self-timed PASSU cycle, and is ‘0’ when  
it is completed.  
If the PASSU command supplied password does not match the hidden password in the Password Register, an  
error is reported by setting the P_ERR bit to ‘1. The WIP bit of the status register also remains set to ‘1. It is  
necessary to use the CLSR command to clear the status register, the RESET command to software reset the  
device, or drive the RESET# input LOW to initiate a hardware reset, in order to return the P_ERR and WIP bits to  
‘0. This returns the device to standby state, ready for new commands such as a retry of the PASSU command.  
If the password does match, the PPB Lock bit is set to ‘1. The maximum clock frequency for the PASSU command  
is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Password Byte 1  
Password Byte 8  
Figure 80  
Password Unlock (PASSU E9h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
105  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.9  
Reset commands  
10.9.1  
Software Reset command (RESET F0h)  
The Software Reset command (RESET) restores the device to its initial power up state, except for the volatile  
FREEZE bit in the Configuration register CR1[1] and the volatile PPB Lock bit in the PPB Lock Register. The Freeze  
bit and the PPB Lock bit will remain set at their last value prior to the software reset. To clear the FREEZE bit and  
set the PPB Lock bit to its protection mode selected power on state, a full power-on-reset sequence or hardware  
reset must be done. Note that the nonvolatile bits in the configuration register, TBPROT, TBPARM, and BPNV,  
retain their previous state after a Software Reset. The Block Protection bits BP2, BP1, and BP0, in the status  
register will only be reset if they are configured as volatile via the BPNV bit in the Configuration Register (CR1[3])  
and FREEZE is cleared to ‘0. The software reset cannot be used to circumvent the FREEZE or PPB Lock bit  
protection mechanisms for the other security configuration bits. The reset command is executed when CS# is  
brought to HIGH state and requires tRPH time to execute.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 81  
Dual-Quad Software Reset (RESET F0h) command sequence  
10.9.2  
Mode Bit Reset (MBR FFh)  
The Mode Bit Reset (MBR) command can be used to return the device from continuous high performance read  
mode back to normal standby awaiting any new command. Because some device packages lack a hardware  
RESET# input and a device that is in a continuous high performance read mode may not recognize any normal  
SPI command, a system hardware reset or software reset command may not be recognized by the device. It is  
recommended to use the MBR command after a system reset when the RESET# signal is not available or, before  
sending a software reset, to ensure the device is released from continuous high performance read mode.  
The MBR command sends Ones on IO0 and IO4 for 8 SCK cycles. IO1–IO3 and IO5–IO7 are ‘don’t care’ during these  
cycles.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1-IO3  
IO4  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
IO5-IO7  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 82  
Dual-Quad SPI Mode Bit (MBR FFh) Reset command sequence  
Datasheet  
106  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
10.10  
Embedded algorithm performance tables  
Table 42  
Program and erase performance  
Parameter  
[53]  
[54]  
Symbol  
Min Typ  
Max  
2000  
Unit  
ms  
t
t
WRR write time  
560  
340  
W
[55, 56]  
Page programming (1024 bytes)  
750/1300  
µs  
PP  
Sector erase time (512-kB logical sectors = 4 x 128-kB physical  
sectors)  
t
520  
103  
2600  
460  
ms  
sec  
SE  
BE  
t
Bulk erase time  
Table 43  
Program suspend AC parameters  
Parameter  
Program Suspend Latency  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Comments  
The time from Program Suspend command  
until the WIP bit is ‘0.  
40  
µs  
(t  
)
PSL  
Minimum is the time needed to issue the next  
Program Suspend command but typical  
periods are needed for Program to progress to  
completion  
Program Resume to next  
Program Suspend (t  
0.06  
100  
µs  
)
PRS  
Table 44  
Erase suspend AC parameters  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Comments  
The time from Erase Suspend command until  
the WIP bit is ‘0.  
Erase Suspend Latency (t  
)
45  
µs  
ESL  
Minimum is the time needed to issue the next  
Erase Suspend command but typical periods  
are needed for the Erase to progress to  
completion  
Erase Resume to next Erase  
0.06  
100  
µs  
Suspend (t  
ERS)  
Notes  
53.Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, VCC = 3.0 V; random data pattern.  
54.Under worst case conditions of 90°C; 100,000 cycles max.  
55.Industrial temperature range / Industrial Plus temperature range.  
56.Maximum value also applies to OTPP, PPBP, ASPP, PASSP, ABWR, and PNVDLR programming commands.  
Datasheet  
107  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data integrity  
11  
Data integrity  
11.1  
Erase endurance  
Table 45  
Erase endurance  
Parameter  
Minimum  
100K  
Unit  
Program/erase cycles per main Flash array sectors  
P/E cycle  
P/E cycle  
[57]  
Program/erase cycles per PPB array or nonvolatile register array  
100K  
11.2  
Data retention  
Table 46  
Data retention  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
10K program/erase cycles  
100K program/erase cycles  
Minimum time  
Unit  
Years  
Years  
20  
2
Data retention time  
Note  
57.Each write command to a nonvolatile register causes a P/E cycle on the entire nonvolatile register array. OTP  
bits and registers internally reside in a separate array that is not P/E cycled.  
Datasheet  
108  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
12  
Software interface reference  
12.1  
Serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) address map  
The SFDP address space has a header starting at address zero that identifies the SFDP data structure and provides  
a pointer to each parameter. One Basic Flash parameter is mandated by the JEDEC JESD216B standard. Two  
optional parameter tables for Sector Map and 4 Byte Address Instructions follow the Basic Flash table. Infineon  
provides an additional parameter by pointing to the ID-CFI address space i.e. the ID-CFI address space is a sub-set  
of the SFDP address space. The parameter tables portion of the SFDP data structure are located within the ID-CFI  
address space and is thus both a CFI parameter and an SFDP parameter. In this way both SFDP and ID-CFI  
information can be accessed by either the RSFDP or RDID commands.  
Table 47  
SFDP overview map  
Byte address  
Description  
0000h  
,,,  
Location zero within JEDEC JESD216B SFDP space — start of SFDP header  
Remainder of SFDP header followed by undefined space  
1000h  
...  
Location zero within ID-CFI space — start of ID-CFI parameter tables  
ID-CFI parameters  
1120h  
...  
Start of SFDP parameter which is also one of the CFI parameter tables  
Remainder of SFDP parameter tables followed by either more CFI parameters or undefined space  
Datasheet  
109  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
12.1.1  
Field definitions  
Table 48  
SFDP header  
Relative byte SFDP Dword  
Data  
Description  
address  
address  
This is the entry point for Read SFDP (5Ah) command i.e. location zero  
within SFDP space ASCII “S”  
00h  
53h  
SFDP Header  
1st DWORD  
01h  
02h  
03h  
46h  
44h  
50h  
ASCII “F”  
ASCII “D”  
ASCII “P”  
SFDP Minor Revision (06h = JEDEC JESD216 Revision B) This revision is  
backward compatible with all prior minor revisions. Minor revisions are  
changes that define previously reserved fields, add fields to the end, or  
that clarify definitions of existing fields. Increments of the minor revision  
value indicate that previously reserved parameter fields may have been  
assigned a new definition or entire Dwords may have been added to the  
parameter table. However, the definition of previously existing fields is  
unchanged and therefore remain backward compatible with earlier SFDP  
parameter table revisions. Software can safely ignore increments of the  
minor revision number, as long as only those parameters the software was  
designed to support are used i.e. previously reserved fields and additional  
Dwords must be masked or ignored. Do not do a simple compare on the  
minor revision number, looking only for a match with the revision number  
that the software is designed to handle. There is no problem with using a  
higher number minor revision.  
04h  
06h  
SFDP Header  
2nd DWORD  
SFDP Major Revision This is the original major revision. This major revision  
is compatible with all SFDP reading and parsing software.  
05h  
01h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
05h  
FFh  
00h  
Number of Parameter Headers (zero based, 05h = 6 parameters)  
Unused  
Parameter ID LSB (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = JESD216) — This older revision parameter  
header is provided for any legacy SFDP reading and parsing software that  
requires seeing a minor revision 0 parameter header. SFDP software  
designed to handle later minor revisions should continue reading  
parameter headers looking for a higher numbered minor revision that  
contains additional parameters for that software revision.  
09h  
00h  
Parameter  
Header 0  
1st DWORD  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision — all SFDP  
software is compatible with this major revision.  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
01h  
09h  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 09h = 9  
Dwords  
20h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic SPI  
Flash parameter byte offset = 1120h  
Parameter  
Header 0  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
2nd DWORD  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSB (FFh = JEDEC defined legacy Parameter ID)  
Datasheet  
110  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 48  
SFDP header (Continued)  
Relative byte SFDP Dword  
Data  
Description  
address  
address  
10h  
00h  
Parameter ID LSB (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (05h = JESD216 Revision A) — This older revision  
parameter header is provided for any legacy SFDP reading and parsing  
software that requires seeing a minor revision 5 parameter header. SFDP  
software designed to handle later minor revisions should continue reading  
parameter headers looking for a later minor revision that contains  
additional parameters.  
11h  
05h  
Parameter  
Header 1  
1st DWORD  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision — all SFDP  
software is compatible with this major revision.  
12h  
13h  
14h  
01h  
10h  
20h  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 10h =  
16 Dwords  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic SPI  
Flash parameter byte offset = 1120h address  
Parameter  
Header 1 2nd  
DWORD  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
00h  
06h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSB (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)  
Parameter ID LSB (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (06h = JESD216 Revision B)  
Parameter  
Header 2  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software is compatible with this major revision.  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
01h  
10h  
20h  
1st DWORD  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 10h =  
16 Dwords  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic SPI  
Flash parameter byte offset = 1120h address  
Parameter  
Header 2 2nd  
DWORD  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
81h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSB (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)  
Parameter ID LSB (81h = SFDP Sector Map Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = Initial version as defined in JESD216  
Revision B)  
21h  
00h  
Parameter  
Header 3  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision — all SFDP  
software that recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this major  
revision.  
22h  
01h  
1st DWORD  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 02h = 2  
Dwords  
23h  
24h  
02h  
60h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC parameter  
byte offset = 1160h  
Parameter  
Header 3 2nd  
DWORD  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
84h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSB (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)  
Parameter ID LSB (00h = SFDP 4 Byte Address Instructions Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = Initial version as defined in JESD216  
Revision B)  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
00h  
01h  
02h  
Parameter  
Header 4  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software that recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this major  
revision.  
1st DWORD  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) (2h = 2  
Dwords)  
Datasheet  
111  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 48  
SFDP header (Continued)  
Relative byte SFDP Dword  
Data  
Description  
address  
address  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC parameter  
byte offset = 1168h  
2Ch  
68h  
Parameter  
Header 4 2nd  
DWORD  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSB (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)  
Parameter ID LSB (Infineon Vendor Specific ID-CFI parameter) Legacy  
Manufacturer ID 01h = AMD / Infineon  
30h  
31h  
01h  
01h  
Parameter Minor Revision (01h = ID-CFI updated with SFDP Rev B table)  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software that recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this major  
revision.  
Parameter  
Header 5  
32h  
01h  
1st DWORD  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) CFI  
starts at 1000h, the final SFDP parameter (CFI ID = A5) starts at 111Eh (SFDP  
starting point of 1120h -2hB of CFI parameter header), for a length of 11EhB  
excluding the CFI A5 parameter. The final CFI A5 parameter adds an  
additional 52hB for a total of 11Eh + 82h = 170hB. 170hB/4 = 5Ch Dwords.  
33h  
34h  
5Ch  
00h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) Entry point for  
ID-CFI parameter is byte offset = 1000h relative to SFDP location zero.  
Parameter  
Header 5 2nd  
DWORD  
35h  
36h  
37h  
10h  
00h  
01h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSB (01h = JEDEC JEP106 Bank Number 1)  
Datasheet  
112  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
12.2  
Device ID and common flash interface (ID-CFI) address map  
Field definitions  
12.2.1  
Table 49  
Manufacturer and Device ID  
Byte address  
Data  
01h  
79h  
21h  
Description  
00h  
01h  
02h  
Manufacturer ID for Infineon  
Device ID Most Significant Byte — Memory Interface Type  
Device ID Least Significant Byte — Density  
ID-CFI Length — number bytes following. Adding this value to the  
current location of 03h gives the address of the last valid location in the  
ID-CFI address map. A value of 00h indicates the entire 512-byte ID-CFI  
space must be read because the actual length of the ID-CFI information  
is longer than can be indicated by this legacy single byte field. The  
value is OPN dependent.  
03h  
4Eh  
00h (Uniform 512-kB  
sectors)  
04h  
Sector Architecture  
05h  
06h  
80h (FL-S Family)  
xxh  
Family ID  
ASCII characters for Model  
Refer to “Ordering information” on page 134 for the model  
number definitions.  
07h  
xxh  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Table 50  
CFI query identification string  
Byte address  
Data  
Description  
10h  
11h  
12h  
51h  
52h  
59h  
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”  
13h  
14h  
02h  
00h  
Primary OEM Command Set  
FL-P backward compatible command set ID  
15h  
16h  
40h  
00h  
Address for Primary Extended Table  
17h  
18h  
53h  
46h  
Alternate OEM Command Set  
ASCII characters “FS” for SPI (F) interface, S Technology  
19h  
1Ah  
51h  
00h  
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table  
Datasheet  
113  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 51  
CFI system interface string  
Byte address  
Data  
Description  
Min. (erase/program): 100 millivolts  
Max. (erase/program): 100 millivolts  
1Bh  
1Ch  
27h  
V
V
V
V
CC  
CC  
PP  
PP  
36h  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
00h  
00h  
Min. voltage (00h = no V present)  
PP  
Max. voltage (00h = no V present)  
PP  
N
06h  
Typical timeout per single byte program 2 µs  
N
09h (512B page)  
09h (512 kB)  
11h (1024 Mb)  
02h  
Typical timeout for Min. size Page program 2 µs (00h = not supported)  
N
Typical timeout per individual sector erase 2 ms  
N
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2 ms (00h = not supported)  
N
Max. timeout for byte program 2 times typical  
N
02h  
Max. timeout for page program 2 times typical  
N
03h  
Max. timeout per individual sector erase 2 times typical  
N
03h  
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2 times typical (00h = not supported)  
Table 52  
Device geometry definition for 1024-Mbit device  
Byte address  
Data  
1Bh (1024 Mb)  
03h  
Description  
N
27h  
28h  
Device Size = 2 bytes;  
Flash Device Interface Description;  
0000h = x8 only  
0001h = x16 only  
0002h = x8/x16 capable  
0003h = x32 only  
29h  
01h  
0004h = Single I/O SPI, 3-byte address  
0005h = Multi I/O SPI, 3-byte address  
0102h = Multi I/O SPI, 3- or 4-byte address  
0103h = Dual-Quad SPI, 3 or 4-byte address  
N
2Ah  
2Bh  
0Ah  
00h  
Max. number of bytes in multi-byte write = 2  
(0000 = not supported  
0009h = 512B page  
000Ah = 1024B page)  
Number of Erase Block Regions within device  
1 = Uniform Device, 2 = Boot Device  
2Ch  
01h  
2Dh  
2Eh  
FFh  
00h  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
Erase Block Region 1 Information (refer to JEDEC JEP137)  
256 sectors = 256-1 = 00FFh  
2Fh  
512-kB sectors = 256 bytes x 0800h  
30h  
31h thru 3Fh  
RFU  
Datasheet  
114  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 53  
CFI primary vendor-specific extended query  
Byte address  
Data  
50h  
52h  
49h  
31h  
33h  
Description  
40h  
41h  
42h  
43h  
44h  
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”  
Major version number = 1, ASCII  
Minor version number = 3, ASCII  
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1–0)  
00b = Required  
01b = Not Required  
Process Technology (Bits 5–2)  
0000b = 0.23 µm Floating Gate  
0001b = 0.17 µm Floating Gate  
0010b = 0.23 µm MIRRORBIT™  
0011b = 0.11 µm Floating Gate  
0100b = 0.11 µm MIRRORBIT™  
0101b = 0.09 µm MIRRORBIT™  
1000b = 0.065 µm MIRRORBIT™  
45h  
21h  
Erase Suspend  
0 = Not Supported  
1 = Read Only  
46h  
02h  
2 = Read and Program  
Sector Protect  
47h  
48h  
01h  
00h  
00 = Not Supported  
X = Number of sectors in group  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
00 = Not Supported  
01 = Supported  
Sector Protect/Unprotect Scheme  
04 = High Voltage Method  
49h  
08h  
05 = Software Command Locking Method  
08 = Advanced Sector Protection Method  
09 = Secure  
Simultaneous Operation  
00 = Not Supported  
4Ah  
4Bh  
00h  
01h  
X = Number of Sectors  
Burst Mode (Synchronous sequential read) support  
00 = Not Supported  
01 = Supported  
Page Mode Type, model dependent  
00 = Not Supported  
01 = 4 Word Read Page  
4Ch  
05h  
02 = 8 Read Word Page  
03 = 256-Byte Program Page  
04 = 512-Byte Program Page  
05 = 1024-Byte Program Page  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum  
00 = Not Supported, 100 mV  
4Dh  
4Eh  
00h  
00h  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum  
00 = Not Supported, 100 mV  
Datasheet  
115  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 53  
CFI primary vendor-specific extended query (Continued)  
Byte address  
Data  
Description  
WP# Protection  
00 = None  
01 = Whole Chip  
4Fh  
50h  
00h  
04 = Uniform Device with Bottom WP Protect  
05 = Uniform Device with Top WP Protect  
07 = Uniform Device with Top or Bottom Write Protect (user select)  
Program Suspend  
00 = Not Supported  
01 = Supported  
01h  
The alternate vendor-specific extended query provides information related to the expanded command set  
provided by the S79FL-S family. The alternate query parameters use a format in which each parameter begins  
with an identifier byte and a parameter length byte. Driver software can check each parameter ID and can use the  
length value to skip to the next parameter if the parameter is not needed or not recognized by the software.  
Table 54  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query header  
Byte address  
Data  
41h  
4Ch  
54h  
32h  
30h  
Description  
51h  
52h  
53h  
54h  
55h  
Query-unique ASCII string “ALT”  
Major version number = 2, ASCII  
Minor version number = 0, ASCII  
Datasheet  
116  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 55  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 0  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
00h  
Parameter ID (ordering part number)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value + 1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
01h  
10h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
53h  
37h  
ASCII “S” for manufacturer (Infineon)  
ASCII “79” for Product Characters (Dual-Quad SPI)  
39h  
46h  
ASCII “FL” for Interface Characters (SPI 3 Volt)  
4Ch  
30h (1 Gb)  
31h (1 Gb)  
47h (1 Gb)  
53h  
ASCII characters for density  
ASCII “S” for technology (65-nm MIRRORBIT™)  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
Reserved for Future Use (RFU)  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
Table 56  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 80h address options  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
80h  
Parameter ID (ordering part number)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value + 1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
01h  
01h  
F0h  
Bits 7:4 - Reserved = 1111b  
Bit 3 - AutoBoot support - Yes= 0b, No = 1b  
Bit 2 - 4-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b, No = 1b  
Bit 1 - Bank address + 3-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b,  
No = 1b  
02h  
Bit 0 - 3-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b, No = 1b  
Datasheet  
117  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 57  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 84h suspend commands  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
84h  
Parameter ID (Suspend Commands)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value + 1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
01h  
08h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
85h  
28h  
8Ah  
64h  
75h  
2Dh  
7Ah  
64h  
Program suspend instruction code  
Program suspend latency maximum (µs)  
Program resume instruction code  
Program resume to next suspend typical (µs)  
Erase suspend instruction code  
Erase suspend latency maximum (µs)  
Erase resume instruction code  
Erase resume to next suspend typical (µs)  
Table 58  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 88h data protection  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
88h  
Parameter ID (Data Protection)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value + 1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
01h  
04h  
N
02h  
03h  
0Bh  
01h  
OTP size 2 bytes, FFh = not supported  
OTP address map format, 01h = FL-S format, FFh = not supported  
Block Protect Type, model dependent  
00h = FL-P, FL-S, FFh = not supported  
04h  
05h  
xxh  
01h  
Advanced Sector Protection type, model dependent  
01h = FL-S ASP  
Table 59  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 8Ch reset timing  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
8Ch  
Parameter ID (Reset Timing)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value + 1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
01h  
06h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
96h  
01h  
23h  
00h  
23h  
00h  
POR maximum value  
N
POR maximum exponent 2 µs  
Hardware Reset maximum value, FFh = not supported  
N
Hardware Reset maximum exponent 2 µs  
Software Reset maximum value, FFh = not supported  
N
Software Reset maximum exponent 2 µs  
Datasheet  
118  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 60  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h — EHPLC (SDR)  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
90h  
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value + 1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
01h  
56h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
06h  
0Eh  
46h  
43h  
03h  
13h  
0Bh  
0Ch  
FFh  
FFh  
6Bh  
6Ch  
FFh  
FFh  
EBh  
ECh  
32h  
03h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
00h  
FFh  
FFh  
02h  
01h  
50h  
00h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
Number of rows  
Row length in bytes  
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header  
ASCII “C” for Code column header  
Read 3-byte address instruction  
Read 4-byte address instruction  
Read Fast 3-byte address instruction  
Read Fast 4-byte address instruction  
Read Dual Out 3-byte address instruction  
Read Dual Out 3-byte address instruction  
Read Quad Out 3-byte address instruction  
Read Quad Out 4-byte address instruction  
Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Quad I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
Quad I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (11b)  
Read mode cycles  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (80 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (00b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Datasheet  
119  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 60  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h — EHPLC (SDR) (Continued)  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
2Ch  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
31h  
32h  
33h  
34h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
3Dh  
3Eh  
3Fh  
40h  
41h  
42h  
43h  
44h  
45h  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
4Bh  
4Ch  
4Dh  
4Eh  
4Fh  
50h  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
FFh  
02h  
04h  
5Ah  
01h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
FFh  
02h  
04h  
68h  
02h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
FFh  
02h  
05h  
85h  
02h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (90 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (01b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (104 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 6, SCK frequency limit for this row (133 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Datasheet  
120  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 60  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h — EHPLC (SDR) (Continued)  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
51h  
52h  
53h  
54h  
55h  
56h  
57h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Note:  
FFh = Not supported.  
Datasheet  
121  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 61  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 9Ah — EHPLC (DDR)  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
9Ah  
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value + 1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
01h  
2Ah  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
05h  
08h  
46h  
43h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
EDh  
EEh  
32h  
03h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
01h  
03h  
50h  
00h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
01h  
06h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
Number of rows  
Row length in bytes  
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header  
ASCII “C” for Code column header  
Read Fast DDR 3-byte address instruction  
Read Fast DDR 4-byte address instruction  
DDR Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
DDR Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Read DDR Quad I/O 3-byte address instruction  
Read DDR Quad I/O 4-byte address instruction  
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (11b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (80 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (00b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (01b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Datasheet  
122  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 61  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 9Ah — EHPLC (DDR) (Continued)  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Note:  
FFh = Not supported.  
Datasheet  
123  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 62  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter F0h RFU  
Parameter relative byte  
address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
F0h  
Parameter ID (RFU)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value + 1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
01h  
0Fh  
02h  
...  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
10h  
This parameter type (Parameter ID F0h) may appear multiple times and have a different length each time. The  
parameter is used to reserve space in the ID-CFI map or to force space (pad) to align a following parameter to a  
required boundary.  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
00h  
N/A  
A5h  
CFI Parameter ID (JEDEC SFDP)  
CFI Parameter Length (The number of  
following bytes in this parameter. Adding this  
value to the current location value + 1 = the  
first byte of the next parameter)  
01h  
N/A  
50h  
Start of SFDP JEDEC parameter, located at  
1120h in the overall SFDP address space.  
Bits 7:5 = unused = 111b  
Bits 4:3 = 06h is status register write  
instruction and status register is default  
nonvolatile = 00b  
02h  
03h  
04h  
00h  
01h  
02h  
E7h  
FFh  
EAh  
Bit 2 = Program Buffer > 64 bytes = 1  
Bits 1:0 = Uniform 4-kB erase unavailable = 11b  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Bits 15:8 = Uniform 4-kB erase opcode = not  
supported = FFh  
Parameter  
Dword-1  
Bit 23 = Unused = 1b  
Bit 22 = Supports Quad Out Read = Yes = 1b  
Bit 21 = Supports Quad I/O Read = Yes =1b  
Bit 20 = Supports Dual I/O Read = Yes = 1b  
Bit19 = Supports DDR 0 = No, 1 = Yes  
Bits 18:17 = Number of Address Bytes, 3 or 4 =  
01b  
Bit 16 = Supports Dual Out Read = Yes = 1b  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
3Fh  
Bits 31:24 = unused = FFh  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Density in bits, zero based, 1 Gb = 3FFFFFFFh  
Parameter  
Dword-2  
Datasheet  
124  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
Bits 7:5 = number of Quad I/O Mode cycles =  
010b  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
44h  
EBh  
08h  
6Bh  
Bits 4:0 = number of Quad I/O Dummy cycles =  
00100b for default latency code 00b  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Quad I/O instruction code  
Parameter  
Dword-3  
Bits 23:21 = number of Quad Out Mode cycles  
= 000b  
Bits 20:16 = number of Quad Out Dummy  
cycles = 01000b  
Quad Out instruction code  
Bits 7:5 = number of Dual Out Mode cycles (not  
supported) = 000b  
0Eh  
0Fh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
00h  
FFh  
Bits 4:0 = number of Dual Out Dummy cycles  
(not supported) = 00000b for default latency  
code  
Dual Out instruction code (not supported) =  
FFh  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Bits 23:21 = number of Dual I/O Mode cycles  
(not supported) = 000b for HPLC  
Parameter  
Dword-4  
Bits 20:16 = number of Dual I/O Dummy cycles  
(not supported) = 00000b for EHPLC or 00100b  
for HPLC Default Latency code = 00b (not  
supported)  
10h  
0Eh  
00h  
Dual I/O instruction code (not supported) =  
FFh  
11h  
12h  
0Fh  
10h  
FFh  
EEh  
Bits 7:5 RFU = 111b  
Bit 4 = QPI (supported) = No = 0b  
Bits 3:1 RFU = 111b  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Bit 0 = Dual All (not supported) = 0b  
Parameter  
Dword-5  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 23:16 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 7:0 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Bits 23:21 = number of Dual All Mode cycles  
(not supported) = 000b  
Parameter  
Dword-6  
18h  
16h  
00h  
Bits 20:16 = number of Dual All Dummy cycles  
(not supported) = 00000b  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
17h  
18h  
19h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
Dual All instruction code (not supported) = FFh  
Bits 7:0 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Bits 23:21 = number of QPI cycles (not  
supported) = 000b  
Parameter  
Dword-7  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Ah  
1Bh  
00h  
FFh  
Bits 20:16 = number of QPI Dummy cycles (not  
supported) = 00000b  
Bits 31:24 (4-4-4) (not supported) = FFh  
Datasheet  
125  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
N
Erase type 1 size 2 bytes (not supported) =  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
00h  
FFh  
00h  
00h  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Erase type 1 instruction (not supported) = FFh  
N
Parameter  
Dword-8  
Erase type 2 size 2 bytes (not supported) =  
00h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
FFh  
13h  
D8h  
Erase type 2 instruction (not supported) = FFh  
N
Erase type 3 size 2 bytes = 512 kB = 13h  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Erase type 3 instruction  
N
Erase type 4 size 2 bytes (not supported) =  
Parameter  
Dword-9  
24h  
22h  
00h  
00h  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
FFh  
F2h  
FFh  
0Fh  
Erase type 4 instruction (not supported) = FFh  
Bits 31:30 = Erase type 4 Erase, Typical time  
units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms, 11b:  
1 s) = RFU = 11b  
Bits 29:25 = Erase type 4 Erase, Typical time  
count = RFU = 11111b (typical erase time =  
(count + 1) * units = RFU)  
Bits 24:23 = Erase type 3 Erase, Typical time  
units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms, 11b:  
1 s) = 128 ms = 10b  
Bits 22:18 = Erase type 3 Erase, Typical time  
count = 00011b (typical erase time = (count +  
1) * units = 4*128 ms = 512 ms)  
Bits 17:16 = Erase type 2 Erase, Typical time  
units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms, 11b:  
1 s) = RFU = 11b  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Bits 15:11 = Erase type 2 Erase, Typical time  
count = RFU = 11111b (typical erase time =  
(count + 1) * units = RFU)  
Parameter  
Dword-10  
29h  
27h  
FFh  
Bits 10:9 = Erase type 1 Erase, Typical time  
units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms, 11b:  
1 s) = RFU = 11b  
Bits 8:4 = Erase type 1 Erase, Typical time  
count = RFU = 11111b (typical erase time =  
(count + 1) * units = RFU)  
Bits 3:0 = Multiplier from typical erase time to  
maximum erase time = 2*(N+1), N=2h = 6x  
multiplier Binary Fields:  
11-11111-10-00011-11-11111-11-11111-0010  
Nibble Format:  
1111_1111_0000_1111_1111_1111_1111_001  
0 Hex Format: FF_0F_FF_F2  
Datasheet  
126  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
2Ah  
2Bh  
2Ch  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
A1h  
25h  
07h  
Bit 31 Reserved = 1b  
Bits 30:29 = Chip Erase, Typical time units  
(00b: 16 ms, 01b: 256 ms,  
10b: 4 s, 11b: 64 s) = 4s = 10b  
Bits 28:24 = Chip Erase, Typical time count,  
(count + 1)*units, count = 11001b, (typical  
program time = (count + 1) * units = 26*.4 µs =  
104s  
Bit 23 = Byte Program Typical time, additional  
byte units (0b:1 µs, 1b:8 µs) =  
1 µs = 0b  
Bits 22:19 = Byte Program Typical time,  
additional byte count, (count + 1)*units, count  
= 0000b, (typical program time = (count + 1) *  
units =  
1*1 µs = 1 µs  
Bit 18 = Byte Program Typical time, first byte  
units (0b:1 µs, 1b:8 µs) =  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
8 µs = 1b  
Parameter  
Dword-11  
Bits 17:14 = Byte Program Typical time, first  
byte count, (count + 1)*units, count = 1100b,  
(typical program time = (count + 1) * units =  
13*8 µs = 104 µs  
2Dh  
2Bh  
D9h  
Bit 13 = Page Program Typical time units (0b:8  
µs, 1b:64 µs) = 64 µs = 1b  
Bits 12:8 = Page Program Typical time count,  
(count + 1)*units, count = 00101b, (typical  
program time = (count + 1) * units = 6*64 µs =  
384 µs)  
N
Bits 7:4 = Page size 2 , N=9h, = 512B page  
Bits 3:0 = Multiplier from typical time to  
maximum for Page or Byte program =  
2*(N + 1), N=1h = 4x multiplier Binary Fields:  
1-10-11001-0-0000-1-1100-1-00101-1001-000  
1 Nibble Format:  
1101_1001_0000_0111_0010_0101_1001_000  
1 Hex Format: D9_07_25_91  
Datasheet  
127  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
2Ch  
2Dh  
2Eh  
ECh  
83h  
18h  
Bit 31 = Suspend and Resume supported = 0b  
Bits 30:29 = Suspend in-progress erase max  
latency units (00b: 128 ns, 01b: 1 µs, 10b: 8 µs,  
11b: 64 µs) = 8 µs = 10b  
Bits 28:24 = Suspend in-progress erase max  
latency count = 00101b, max erase suspend  
latency = (count + 1) * units =  
6*8 µs = 48 µs  
Bits 23:20 = Erase resume to suspend interval  
count = 0001b, interval =  
(count + 1) * 64 µs = 2 * 64 µs = 128 µs  
Bits 19:18 = Suspend in-progress program max  
latency units (00b: 128 ns, 01b: 1 µs, 10b: 8 µs,  
11b: 64 µs) = 8 µs = 10b  
Bits 17:13 = Suspend in-progress program max  
latency count = 00100b, max erase suspend  
latency = (count + 1) * units = 5*8 µs = 40 µs  
Bits 12:9 = Program resume to suspend  
interval count = 0001b, interval =  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
(count + 1) * 64 µs = 2 * 64 µs = 128 µs  
Bit 8 = RFU = 1b  
Parameter  
Dword-12  
Bits 7:4 = Prohibited operations during erase  
suspend = xxx0b: May not initiate a new erase  
anywhere (erase nesting not permitted) +  
xx1xb: May not initiate a page program in the  
erase suspended sector size + x1xxb: May not  
initiate a read in the erase suspended sector  
size + 1xxxb: The erase and program restric-  
tions in bits 5:4 are sufficient = 1110b  
Bits 3:0 = Prohibited Operations During  
Program Suspend = xxx0b: May not initiate a  
new erase anywhere (erase nesting not  
permitted) + xx0xb: May not initiate a new  
page program anywhere (program nesting not  
permitted) + x1xxb: May not initiate a read in  
the program suspended page size + 1xxxb: The  
erase and program restrictions in bits 1:0 are  
sufficient = 1100b Binary Fields:  
31h  
2Fh  
45h  
0-10-00101-0001-10-00100-0001-1-1110-1100  
Nibble Format:  
0100_0101_0001_1000_1000_0011_1110_110  
0 Hex Format: 45_18_83_EC  
32h  
33h  
34h  
35h  
30h  
31h  
32h  
33h  
8Ah  
85h  
7Ah  
75h  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Bits 31:24 = Erase Suspend Instruction = 75h  
Bits 23:16 = Erase Resume Instruction = 7Ah  
Bits 15:8 = Program Suspend Instruction = 85h  
Bits 7:0 = Program Resume Instruction = 8Ah  
Parameter  
Dword-13  
Datasheet  
128  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
36h  
37h  
38h  
34h  
35h  
36h  
F7h  
FFh  
FFh  
Bit 31 = Deep Power Down Supported (not  
supported) = 1  
Bits 30:23 = Enter Deep Power Down  
Instruction (not supported) = FFh  
Bits 22:15 = Exit Deep Power Down Instruction  
(not supported) = FFh  
Bits 14:13 = Exit Deep Power Down to next  
operation delay units = (00b: 128 ns, 01b: 1 µs,  
10b: 8 µs, 11b: 64 µs) = 64 µs = 11b  
Bits 12:8 = Exit Deep Power Down to next  
operation delay count = 11111b, Exit Deep  
Power Down to next operation delay =  
(count+1)*units (not supported)  
Bits 7:4 = RFU = Fh  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Parameter  
Dword-14  
Bits 3:2 = Status Register Polling Device Busy =  
01b: Legacy status polling supported = Use  
legacy polling by reading the Status Register  
with 05h instruction and checking WIP bit[0] (0  
= ready; 1=busy).  
39h  
37h  
FFh  
Bits 1:0 = RFU = 11b  
Binary Fields:  
1-11111111-11111111-11-11111-1111-01-11  
Nibble Format:  
1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_  
1111_0111  
Hex Format: FF_FF_FF_F7  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
38h  
39h  
3Ah  
00h  
F6h  
5Dh  
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh  
Bit 23 = Hold and WP Disable = not supported  
= 0b  
Bits 22:20 = Quad Enable Requirements =  
101b: QE is bit 1 of the Status Register 2. Status  
Register 1 is read using Read Status  
instruction 05h. Status Register 2 is read using  
instruction 35h. QE is set via Write Status  
instruction 01h with two data bytes where bit  
1 of the second byte is one. It is cleared via  
Write Status with two data bytes where bit 1 of  
the second byte is zero.  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Parameter  
Dword-15  
Bits 19:16 0-4-4 Mode Entry Method = xxx1b:  
Mode Bits[7:0] = A5h Note: QE must be set  
prior to using this mode + x1xxb: Mode  
Bits[7:0] = Axh + 1xxxb: RFU = 1101b  
Bits 15:10 0-4-4 Mode Exit Method = xx_xxx1b:  
Mode Bits[7:0] = 00h will terminate this mode  
at the end of the current read operation +  
xx_1xxxb: Input Fh (mode bit reset) on  
DQ0-DQ3 for 8 clocks. This will terminate the  
mode prior to the next read operation. +  
x1_xxxxb: Mode Bit[7:0] != Axh + 1x_x1xx: RFU  
3Dh  
3Bh  
FFh  
Datasheet  
129  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
3Eh  
3Fh  
40h  
3Ch  
3Dh  
3Eh  
F0h  
28h  
FAh  
Bits 31:24 = Enter 4-byte Addressing =  
xxxx_1xxxb: 8-bit volatile bank register used  
to define A[30:A24] bits. MSB (bit[7]) is used to  
enable/disable 4-byte address mode. When  
MSB is set to ‘1, 4-byte address mode is active  
and A[30:24] bits are don’t care. Read with  
instruction 16h. Write instruction is 17h with 1  
byte of data. When MSB is cleared to ‘0, select  
the active 128-Mbit segment by setting the  
appropriate A[30:24] bits and use 3-byte  
addressing. + xx1x_xxxxb: Supports dedicated  
4-byte address instruction set. Consult vendor  
data sheet for the instruction set definition or  
look for 4 byte Address Parameter Table. +  
1xxx_xxxxb: Reserved = 10101000b  
Bits 23:14 = Exit 4-byte Addressing = xx_xxxx-  
_1xxxb: 8-bit volatile bank register used to  
define A[30:A24] bits. MSB (bit[7]) is used to  
enable/disable 4-byte address mode. When  
MSB is cleared to ‘0, 3-byte address mode is  
active and A30:A24 are used to select the  
active 128-Mbit memory segment. Read with  
instruction 16h. Write instruction is 17h, data  
length is 1 byte. + xx_xx1x_xxxxb: Hardware  
reset + xx_x1xx_xxxxb: Software reset (see bits  
13:8 in this DWORD) + xx_1xxx_xxxxb: Power  
cycle + x1_xxxx_xxxxb: Reserved + 1x_xxxx-  
_xxxxb: Reserved = 1111101000b  
JEDEC Basic  
Flash  
Parameter  
Dword-16  
41h  
3Fh  
A8h  
Bits 13:8 = Soft Reset and Rescue Sequence  
Support = x0_1xxxb: issue instruction F0h +  
1x_xxxxb: exit 0-4-4 mode is required prior to  
other reset sequences above if the device may  
be operating in this mode. = 101000b  
Bit 7 = RFU = 1  
Bits 6:0 = Volatile or Nonvolatile Register and  
Write Enable Instruction for Status Register 1  
= xx1_xxxxb: Status Register 1 contains a mix  
of volatile and nonvolatile bits. The 06h  
instruction is used to enable writing of the  
register. + x1x_xxxxb: Reserved + 1xx_xxxxb:  
Reserved = 1110000b  
Binary Fields:  
10101000-1111101000-101000-1-1110000  
Nibble Format:  
1010_1000_1111_1010_0010_1000_  
1111_0000  
Hex Format: A8_FA_28_F0  
42h  
43h  
44h  
40h  
41h  
42h  
FFh  
00h  
00h  
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh  
JEDEC Sector  
Map  
Bits 23:16 = Region count (Dwords -1) = 00h:  
One region  
Parameter  
Dword-1  
Config-0  
Header  
Bits 15:8 = Configuration ID = 00h: Uniform 256  
kB sectors  
Bits 7:2 = RFU = 111111b  
Bit 1 = Map Descriptor = 1  
Bit 0 = The end descriptor = 1  
45h  
43h  
FFh  
Datasheet  
130  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
46h  
47h  
48h  
44h  
45h  
46h  
F4h  
FFh  
FFh  
Bits 31:8 = Region size = 00FFFFh: Region size  
as count-1 of 256 byte units = 64 MB/256 =  
256K Count = 262144, value = count -1 =  
262144 -1 = 262143 = 3FFFFh  
Bits 4:7 = RFU = Fh Erase Type not supported =  
0/ supported = 1  
JEDEC Sector  
Map  
Bit 3 = Erase Type 4 support = 0b — Erase Type  
4 is not defined  
Parameter  
Dword-2  
Config-0  
Region-0  
Bit 2 = Erase Type 3 support = 1b — Erase Type  
3 is 512 kB erase and is supported in the  
512-kB sector region  
49h  
47h  
7Fh  
Bit 1 = Erase Type 2 support = 0b — Erase Type  
2 is 64 kB erase and is not supported in the  
256-kB sector region  
Bit 0 = Erase Type 1 support = 0b — Erase Type  
1 is 4 kB erase and is not supported in the  
256-kB sector region  
4Ah  
4Bh  
4Ch  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
F3h  
88h  
FFh  
Supported = 1, Not Supported = 0  
Bits 31:20 = RFU = FFFh  
Bit 19 = Support for nonvolatile individual  
sector lock write command, Instruction=E3h =  
1
Bit 18 = Support for nonvolatile individual  
sector lock read command, Instruction=E2h =  
1
Bit 17 = Support for volatile individual sector  
lock Write command, Instruction=E1h = 1  
Bit 16 = Support for volatile individual sector  
lock Read command, Instruction=E0h = 1  
Bit 15 = Support for (1-4-4) DTR_Read  
Command, Instruction = EEh = 1  
Bit 14 = Support for (1-2-2) DTR_Read  
Command, Instruction = BEh = 1  
Bit 13 = Support for (1-1-1) DTR_Read  
Command, Instruction = 0Eh = 1  
Bit 12 = Support for Erase Command — Type 4  
= 0  
JEDEC 4 Byte  
Address  
Bit 11 = Support for Erase Command — Type 3  
= 1  
Instructions  
Parameter  
Dword-1  
Bit 10 = Support for Erase Command — Type 2  
= 0  
4Dh  
4Bh  
FFh  
Bit 9 = Support for Erase Command — Type 1  
= 0  
Bit 8 = Support for (1-4-4) Page Program  
Command, Instruction = 3Eh =0  
Bit 7 = Support for (1-1-4) Page Program  
Command, Instruction = 34h = 1  
Bit 6 = Support for (1-1-1) Page Program  
Command, Instruction = 12h = 1  
Bit 5 = Support for (1-4-4) FAST_READ  
Command, Instruction = ECh = 1  
Bit 4 = Support for (1-1-4) FAST_READ  
Command, Instruction = 6Ch = 1  
Bit 3 = Support for (1-2-2) FAST_READ  
Command, Instruction = BCh = 1  
Bit 2 = Support for (1-1-2) FAST_READ  
Command, Instruction = 3Ch = 1  
Bit 1 = Support for (1-1-1) FAST_READ  
Command, Instruction = 0Ch = 1  
Bit 0 = Support for (1-1-1) READ Command,  
Instruction = 13h = 1  
Datasheet  
131  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)  
CFI parameter  
SFDP parameter  
relative byte  
SFDP Dword  
name  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset  
address offset  
4Eh  
4Fh  
50h  
4Ch  
4Dh  
4Eh  
FFh  
FFh  
DCh  
Bits 31:24 = FFh = Instruction for Erase Type 4:  
JEDEC 4 Byte  
Address  
RFU  
Bits 23:16 = DCh = Instruction for Erase Type 3  
Instructions  
Parameter  
Dword-2  
Bits 15:8 = FFh = Instruction for Erase Type 2:  
RFU  
Bits 7:0 = FFh = Instruction for Erase Type 1:  
RFU  
51h  
4Fh  
FFh  
12.3  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map — automotive  
only  
The CFI Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query is extended to include Electronic Marking information for device  
traceability.  
Table 64  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) map automotive only  
# of  
Data  
Example of  
actualdata  
Address  
Data field  
Hex read out of example data  
bytes  
format  
(SA) + 0180h Size of Electronic Marking  
1
Hex  
20  
14h  
01h  
Revision of Electronic  
(SA) + 0181h  
Marking  
1
Hex  
1
(SA) + 0182h  
(SA) + 018Ah  
(SA) + 018Bh  
(SA) + 018Ch  
(SA) + 018Dh  
Fab Lot #  
Wafer #  
8
1
1
1
7
ASCII  
Hex  
LD87270 4Ch, 44h, 38h, 37h, 32h, 37h, 30h, FFh  
23  
10  
15  
17h  
0Ah  
0Fh  
Die X Coordinate  
Die Y Coordinate  
Class Lot #  
Hex  
Hex  
ASCII  
BR33150 42h, 52h, 33h, 33h, 31h, 35h, 30h  
FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh,  
(SA) + 0194h  
Reserved for Future  
12  
N/A  
N/A  
FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh  
Fab Lot # + Wafer # + Die X Coordinate + Die Y Coordinate gives a unique ID for each device.  
Datasheet  
132  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
12.4  
Initial delivery state  
The device is shipped from Infineon with nonvolatile bits set as follows:  
• The entire memory array is erased: i.e. all bits are set to ‘1’ (each byte contains FFh).  
• The OTP address space has the first 16 bytes programmed to a random number. All other bytes are erased to FFh.  
• The SFDP address space contains the values as defined in the description of the SFDP address space.  
• The ID-CFI address space contains the values as defined in the description of the ID-CFI address space.  
• The Status Register 1 contains 00h (all SR1 bits are cleared to 0’s).  
• The Configuration Register 1 contains 02h.  
• The Autoboot register contains 00h.  
• The Password Register contains FFFFFFFF-FFFFFFFFh.  
• All PPB bits are ‘1.  
• The ASP Register contents are shown here.  
Table 65  
ASP Register content  
Ordering part number model  
C1  
ASPR default value  
FE7Fh  
Datasheet  
133  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Ordering information  
13  
Ordering information  
The ordering part number is formed by a valid combination of the following:  
S79FL 01G  
S
DS  
B
H
V
C
1
0
Packing type  
0 = Tray  
3 = 13” Tape and reel  
Model number (sector type)  
1 = Uniform 512-kB sectors  
Model number (latency type, package details, RESET#)  
C = EHPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET#  
Temperature range / grade  
I = Industrial (–40°C to +85°C)  
V = Industrial Plus (–40°C to +105°C)  
A = Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 3 (–40°C to +85°C)  
B = Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 2 (–40°C to +105°C)  
Package materials  
H = Low-Halogen, Lead (Pb)-free  
Package type  
B = 24-ball BGA 6 x 8 mm package, 1.00 mm pitch  
Speed  
DS = 80 MHz  
AG = 133 MHz  
Device technology  
S = 65 nm MIRRORBIT™ process technology  
Density  
01G = 1024 Mbit  
Device family  
S79FL  
3.0 V-Only, Dual-Quad serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory  
Datasheet  
134  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Ordering information  
13.1  
Valid combinations — standard  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in volume for this device. Consult your local sales  
office to confirm availability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released combinations.  
Table 66  
Valid combinations — standard  
Base ordering part  
number  
Speed  
option  
Package and  
temperature  
Model  
Packing  
type  
[60]  
Package marking  
number  
79FL01GS + S + (Temp) + H + (Model  
Number)  
S79FL01GS  
DS  
BHV  
C1  
0, 3  
13.2  
Valid combinations — automotive grade / AEC-Q100  
Table 67 lists configurations that are automotive grade / AEC-Q100 qualified and are planned to be available in  
volume. The table will be updated as new combinations are released. Contact your local sales representative to  
confirm availability of specific combinations and to check on newly released combinations.  
Production part approval process (PPAP) support is only provided for AEC-Q100 grade products.  
Products to be used in end-use applications that require ISO/TS-16949 compliance must be AEC-Q100 grade  
products in combination with PPAP. Non–AEC-Q100 grade products are not manufactured or documented in full  
compliance with ISO/TS-16949 requirements.  
AEC-Q100 grade products are also offered without PPAP support for end-use applications that do not require  
ISO/TS-16949 compliance.  
Table 67  
Valid combinations — automotive grade / AEC-Q100  
Base  
Speed  
option  
Package and  
temperature  
Model  
Packing  
type  
orderingpart  
number  
Package marking  
number  
S79FL01GS  
DS  
BHA, BHB  
C1  
0, 3  
79FL01GS + S + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)  
Notes  
58.EHPLC = Enhanced High Performance Latency Code table.  
59.Uniform 512-kB sectors = All sectors are uniform 512-kB with a 1024B programming buffer.  
60.Example, S79FL01GSDSBHVC10 package marking would be 79FL01GSSVHC1.  
Datasheet  
135  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Revision history  
Revision history  
Document  
Date of release  
Description of changes  
version  
**  
2014-10-15  
Initial release.  
Global: Promoted data sheet from Advance Information to Preliminary  
Command Set Summary:  
S79FL01GS Command Set (sorted by function) table: corrected ‘Maximum  
Frequency (MHz)’ for DDRQIOR and 4DDRQIOR  
Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters (SFDP) Address Map: Updated  
paragraph, updated SFDP Overview Map table  
*A  
*B  
2015-02-04  
2016-02-01  
Field Definitions: Updated SFDP Header table  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) Address Map:  
Manufacturer and Device ID table: corrected 03h Data  
CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 84h Suspend  
Commands table: corrected 07h Data  
Added table: CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter A5h,  
JEDEC SFDP Rev B  
Changed maximum value of “SCK Clock Frequency for DDR READ” from  
80 MHz to 93 MHz in all instances across the document.  
Updated to Cypress template.  
Changed maximum value of “SCK Clock Frequency for DDR READ” from  
93 MHz to 80 MHz in all instances across the document.  
Added Automotive Temperature Range related information in all instances  
across the document.  
Updated Electrical specifications:  
Added Thermal resistance.  
Updated Address space maps:  
Updated Registers:  
Added ECC Status Register (ECCSR).  
Updated Commands:  
Updated Register Access commands:  
Added ECC Status Register Read (ECCRD 18h).  
Updated Program Flash Array commands:  
Updated Program granularity:  
*C  
2017-01-05  
Added Automatic ECC.  
Added Data integrity.  
Updated Software interface reference:  
Added Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map —  
automotive only.  
Updated Ordering information:  
Updated Ordering Information S79FL01GS:  
Added Automotive Grade Temperature Range related information.  
Added Valid combinations — automotive grade / AEC-Q100.  
Updated to new template.  
Updated Timing specifications:  
Updated SDR AC characteristics:  
Updated Table 11:  
*D  
2017-03-22  
Changed minimum value of tSU parameter from 3 ns to 1.5 ns.  
Updated to new template.  
Datasheet  
136  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Revision history  
Document  
Date of release  
Description of changes  
version  
Replaced “FAB024” with “ZSA024” in all instances across the document.  
Updated Address space maps:  
Updated Registers:  
*E  
2017-06-08  
Updated Configuration Register 1 (CR1):  
Updated details corresponding to Bit 4 (Replaced “RFU” with “DNU”).  
Updated PDF properties data.  
Updated to new template.  
Completing Sunset Review.  
*F  
2018-01-29  
2018-03-21  
Updated Timing specifications:  
Updated SDR AC characteristics:  
Updated Table 11:  
*G  
Removed typical value of tCSH parameter.  
Added “3000 ns” as maximum value of tSU parameter.  
Updated Document Title to read as “S79FL01GS, 1 Gb (128 MB) Dual-Quad  
FL-S Flash SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V.  
Updated Overview:  
Removed “Glossary.  
Removed “Other resources.  
Updated SPI with multiple input / output (SPI-MIO) dual-quad:  
Replaced “Hardware interface” with “SPI with multiple input / output  
(SPI-MIO) Dual-Quad” in heading.  
Updated Electrical specifications:  
Updated Thermal resistance:  
*H  
2022-07-19  
Updated Table 4.  
Removed “Software interface.  
Updated Data integrity:  
Updated Data retention:  
Updated description.  
Migrated to Infineon template.  
Datasheet  
137  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
2022-07-19  
Please read the Important Notice and Warnings at the end of this document  
Trademarks  
All referenced product or service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
For further information on the product, technology,  
The information given in this document shall in no  
event be regarded as a guarantee of conditions or  
characteristics (“Beschaffenheitsgarantie”).  
Edition 2022-07-19  
Published by  
delivery terms and conditions and prices please  
contact your nearest Infineon Technologies office  
(www.infineon.com).  
Infineon Technologies AG  
81726 Munich, Germany  
With respect to any examples, hints or any typical  
values stated herein and/or any information  
regarding the application of the product, Infineon  
Technologies hereby disclaims any and all  
warranties and liabilities of any kind, including  
without limitation warranties of non-infringement of  
intellectual property rights of any third party.  
WARNINGS  
Due to technical requirements products may contain  
dangerous substances. For information on the types  
in question please contact your nearest Infineon  
Technologies office.  
© 2022 Infineon Technologies AG.  
All Rights Reserved.  
Except as otherwise explicitly approved by Infineon  
In addition, any information given in this document  
is subject to customer’s compliance with its  
obligations stated in this document and any  
applicable legal requirements, norms and standards  
concerning customer’s products and any use of the  
product of Infineon Technologies in customer’s  
applications.  
Technologies in  
authorized  
a written document signed by  
Do you have a question about this  
document?  
Go to www.infineon.com/support  
representatives  
of  
Infineon  
Technologies, Infineon Technologies’ products may  
not be used in any applications where a failure of the  
product or any consequences of the use thereof can  
reasonably be expected to result in personal injury.  
Document reference  
002-00466 Rev. *H  
The data contained in this document is exclusively  
intended for technically trained staff. It is the  
responsibility of customer’s technical departments  
to evaluate the suitability of the product for the  
intended application and the completeness of the  
product information given in this document with  
respect to such application.  

相关型号:

S79FL01GSDSBHVC10

Dual QSPI Flash
INFINEON

S79FL01GSDSBHVC13

Dual QSPI Flash
INFINEON

S79FL256S

256 Mbit (32 MB)/512 Mbit (64 MB), 3 V, Dual-Quad SPI Flash
CYPRESS

S79FL512S

256 Mbit (32 MB)/512 Mbit (64 MB), 3 V, Dual-Quad SPI Flash
CYPRESS

S79FS01GSFABHB210

Dual QSPI Flash
INFINEON

S79FS01GSFABHB213

Dual QSPI Flash
INFINEON

S79L05

3-Terminal Negative Voltage Regulator
SECOS

S79L06

3-Terminal Negative Voltage Regulator
SECOS

S79L08

3-Terminal Negative Voltage Regulator
SECOS

S79L09

3-Terminal Negative Voltage Regulator
SECOS

S79L12

3-Terminal Negative Voltage Regulator
SECOS

S79L15

Negative Voltage Regulator
SECOS